summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/manpages/smb.conf.5')
-rw-r--r--docs/manpages/smb.conf.59869
1 files changed, 7201 insertions, 2668 deletions
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5 b/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
index 933d71ff0c..32a40d2609 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
+++ b/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
@@ -1,2719 +1,7252 @@
-.TH SMB.CONF 5 11/10/94 smb.conf smb.conf
+.\" This manpage has been automatically generated by docbook2man-spec
+.\" from a DocBook document. docbook2man-spec can be found at:
+.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/hacks/docbook2X/>
+.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
+.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
+.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "01 April 2002" "" ""
.SH NAME
-smb.conf \- configuration file for smbd
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B smb.conf
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B smb.conf
-file is a configuration file for the Samba suite.
-
-.B smb.conf
-contains runtime configuration information for the
-.B smbd
-program. The
-.B smbd
-program provides LanManager-like services to clients
-using the SMB protocol.
-
-.SH FILE FORMAT
-The file consists of sections and parameters. A section begins with the
-name of the section in square brackets and continues until the next
-section begins. Sections contain parameters of the form 'name = value'.
-
-The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line represents
-either a comment, a section name or a parameter.
-
+smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+The \fIsmb.conf\fR file is a configuration
+file for the Samba suite. \fIsmb.conf\fR contains
+runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The
+\fIsmb.conf\fR file is designed to be configured and
+administered by the \fBswat(8)\fR
+program. The complete description of the file format and
+possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.
+.SH "FILE FORMAT"
+.PP
+The file consists of sections and parameters. A section
+begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues
+until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the
+form
+.PP
+\fIname\fR = \fIvalue
+\fR.PP
+The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated
+line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.
+.PP
Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.
-
-Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. Whitespace before
-or after the first equals sign is discarded. Leading, trailing and internal
-whitespace in section and parameter names is irrelevant. Leading and
-trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded. Internal whitespace
-within a parameter value is retained verbatim.
-
-Any line beginning with a semicolon is ignored, as are lines containing
-only whitespace.
-
-Any line ending in a \\ is "continued" on the next line in the
-customary unix fashion.
-
-The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string
-(no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, 0/1 or
-true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved
-in string values. Some items such as create modes are numeric.
-.SH SERVICE DESCRIPTIONS
-Each section in the configuration file describes a service. The section name
-is the service name and the parameters within the section define the service's
-attributes.
-
-There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers], which are
-described under 'special sections'. The following notes apply to ordinary
-service descriptions.
-
-A service consists of a directory to which access is being given plus a
-description of the access rights which are granted to the user of the
-service. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable.
-
-Services are either filespace services (used by the client as an extension of
-their native file systems) or printable services (used by the client to access
-print services on the host running the server).
-
-Services may be guest services, in which case no password is required to
-access them. A specified guest account is used to define access privileges
-in this case.
-
-Services other than guest services will require a password to access
-them. The client provides the username. As many clients only provide
-passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to
-check against the password using the "user=" option in the service
-definition.
-
-Note that the access rights granted by the server are masked by the access
-rights granted to the specified or guest user by the host system. The
-server does not grant more access than the host system grants.
-
-The following sample section defines a file space service. The user has write
-access to the path /home/bar. The service is accessed via the service name
-"foo":
-
- [foo]
+.PP
+Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant.
+Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded.
+Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter
+names is irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter
+value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value
+is retained verbatim.
+.PP
+Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#')
+character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.
+.PP
+Any line ending in a '\\' is continued
+on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion.
+.PP
+The values following the equals sign in parameters are all
+either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given
+as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean
+values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as
+create modes are numeric.
+.SH "SECTION DESCRIPTIONS"
+.PP
+Each section in the configuration file (except for the
+[global] section) describes a shared resource (known
+as a "share"). The section name is the name of the
+shared resource and the parameters within the section define
+the shares attributes.
+.PP
+There are three special sections, [global],
+[homes] and [printers], which are
+described under \fBspecial sections\fR. The
+following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.
+.PP
+A share consists of a directory to which access is being
+given plus a description of the access rights which are granted
+to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are
+also specifiable.
+.PP
+Sections are either file share services (used by the
+client as an extension of their native file systems) or
+printable services (used by the client to access print services
+on the host running the server).
+.PP
+Sections may be designated \fBguest\fR services,
+in which case no password is required to access them. A specified
+UNIX \fBguest account\fR is used to define access
+privileges in this case.
+.PP
+Sections other than guest services will require a password
+to access them. The client provides the username. As older clients
+only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list
+of usernames to check against the password using the "user ="
+option in the share definition. For modern clients such as
+Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary.
+.PP
+Note that the access rights granted by the server are
+masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest
+UNIX user by the host system. The server does not grant more
+access than the host system grants.
+.PP
+The following sample section defines a file space share.
+The user has write access to the path \fI/home/bar\fR.
+The share is accessed via the share name "foo":
+.sp
+.nf
+ [foo]
path = /home/bar
- writable = true
-
-The following sample section defines a printable service. The service is
-readonly, but printable. That is, the only write access permitted is via
-calls to open, write to and close a spool file. The 'guest ok' parameter
-means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):
-
- [aprinter]
+ writeable = true
+
+
+.sp
+.fi
+.PP
+The following sample section defines a printable share.
+The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write
+access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a
+spool file. The \fBguest ok\fR parameter means
+access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified
+elsewhere):
+.sp
+.nf
+ [aprinter]
path = /usr/spool/public
- read only = true
+ writeable = false
printable = true
- public = true
-
-.SH SPECIAL SECTIONS
-
-.SS The [global] section
-.RS 3
-Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults
-for services which do not specifically define certain items. See the notes
-under 'Parameters' for more information.
-.RE
-
-.SS The [homes] section
-.RS 3
-If a section called 'homes' is included in the configuration file, services
-connecting clients to their home directories can be created on the fly by the
-server.
-
-When the connection request is made, the existing services are scanned. If a
-match is found, it is used. If no match is found, the requested service name is
-treated as a user name and looked up in the local passwords file. If the
-name exists and the correct password has been given, a service is created
-by cloning the [homes] section.
-
-Some modifications are then made to the newly created section:
-
-.RS 3
-The service name is changed from 'homes' to the located username
-
-If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home directory.
-.RE
-
-If you decide to use a path= line in your [homes] section then you may
-find it useful to use the %S macro. For example path=/data/pchome/%S
-would be useful if you have different home directories for your PCs
-than for unix access.
-
-This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access to
-their home directories with a minimum of fuss.
-
-A similar process occurs if the requested service name is "homes", except that
-the service name is not changed to that of the requesting user. This method
-of using the [homes] section works well if different users share a client PC.
-
-The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service section
-can specify, though some make more sense than others. The following is a
-typical and suitable [homes] section:
-
- [homes]
- writable = yes
-
-An important point:
-
-.RS 3
-If guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will
-be accessible to all clients
-.B without a password.
-In the very unlikely event
-that this is actually desirable, it would be wise to also specify read only
-access.
+ guest ok = true
+
+
+.sp
+.fi
+.SH "SPECIAL SECTIONS"
+.SS "THE GLOBAL SECTION"
+.PP
+parameters in this section apply to the server
+as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not
+specifically define certain items. See the notes
+under PARAMETERS for more information.
+.SS "THE HOMES SECTION"
+.PP
+If a section called homes is included in the
+configuration file, services connecting clients to their
+home directories can be created on the fly by the server.
+.PP
+When the connection request is made, the existing
+sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no
+match is found, the requested section name is treated as a
+user name and looked up in the local password file. If the
+name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is
+created by cloning the [homes] section.
+.PP
+Some modifications are then made to the newly
+created share:
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The share name is changed from homes to
+the located username.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+If no path was given, the path is set to
+the user's home directory.
+.PP
+If you decide to use a \fBpath =\fR line
+in your [homes] section then you may find it useful
+to use the %S macro. For example :
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBpath = /data/pchome/%S\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+would be useful if you have different home directories
+for your PCs than for UNIX access.
+.PP
+.PP
+This is a fast and simple way to give a large number
+of clients access to their home directories with a minimum
+of fuss.
+.PP
+.PP
+A similar process occurs if the requested section
+name is "homes", except that the share name is not
+changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using
+the [homes] section works well if different users share
+a client PC.
+.PP
+.PP
+The [homes] section can specify all the parameters
+a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense
+than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes]
+section:
+.PP
+.sp
+.nf
+ [homes]
+ writeable = yes
+
+
+.sp
+.fi
+.PP
+An important point is that if guest access is specified
+in the [homes] section, all home directories will be
+visible to all clients \fBwithout a password\fR.
+In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it
+would be wise to also specify \fBread only
+access\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+Note that the \fBbrowseable\fR flag for
+auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable
+flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as
+it means setting \fBbrowseable = no\fR in
+the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make
+any auto home directories visible.
+.PP
+.SS "THE PRINTERS SECTION"
+.PP
+This section works like [homes],
+but for printers.
+.PP
+If a [printers] section occurs in the
+configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer
+specified in the local host's printcap file.
+.PP
+When a connection request is made, the existing sections
+are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found,
+but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described
+above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a
+printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see
+if the requested section name is a valid printer share name. If
+a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning
+the [printers] section.
+.PP
+A few modifications are then made to the newly created
+share:
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The share name is set to the located printer
+name
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+If no printer name was given, the printer name
+is set to the located printer name
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+If the share does not permit guest access and
+no username was given, the username is set to the located
+printer name.
+.PP
+Note that the [printers] service MUST be
+printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse
+to load the configuration file.
+.PP
+.PP
+Typically the path specified would be that of a
+world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on
+it. A typical [printers] entry would look like
+this:
+.PP
+.sp
+.nf
+ [printers]
+ path = /usr/spool/public
+ guest ok = yes
+ printable = yes
+
+.sp
+.fi
+.PP
+All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file
+are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned.
+If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have
+to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or
+more lines like this:
+.PP
+.sp
+.nf
+ alias|alias|alias|alias...
+
+
+.sp
+.fi
+.PP
+Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for
+your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify
+the new file as your printcap. The server will then only recognize
+names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain
+whatever aliases you like. The same technique could be used
+simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers.
+.PP
+.PP
+An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the
+first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines,
+components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical
+bar symbols ('|').
+.PP
+.PP
+NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what
+printers are defined on the system you may be able to use
+"printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list
+of printers. See the "printcap name" option
+for more details.
+.PP
+.SH "PARAMETERS"
+.PP
+parameters define the specific attributes of sections.
+.PP
+Some parameters are specific to the [global] section
+(e.g., \fBsecurity\fR). Some parameters are usable
+in all sections (e.g., \fBcreate mode\fR). All others
+are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the
+following descriptions the [homes] and [printers]
+sections will be considered normal. The letter \fBG\fR
+in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the
+[global] section. The letter \fBS\fR
+indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific
+section. Note that all \fBS\fR parameters can also be specified in
+the [global] section - in which case they will define
+the default behavior for all services.
+.PP
+parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may
+not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where
+there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer
+to the preferred synonym.
+.SH "VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS"
+.PP
+Many of the strings that are settable in the config file
+can take substitutions. For example the option "path =
+/tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path =
+/tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john.
+.PP
+These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below,
+but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they
+might be relevant. These are:
+.TP
+\fB%S\fR
+the name of the current service, if any.
+.TP
+\fB%P\fR
+the root directory of the current service,
+if any.
+.TP
+\fB%u\fR
+user name of the current service, if any.
+.TP
+\fB%g\fR
+primary group name of %u.
+.TP
+\fB%U\fR
+session user name (the user name that the client
+wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got).
+.TP
+\fB%G\fR
+primary group name of %U.
+.TP
+\fB%H\fR
+the home directory of the user given
+by %u.
+.TP
+\fB%v\fR
+the Samba version.
+.TP
+\fB%h\fR
+the Internet hostname that Samba is running
+on.
+.TP
+\fB%m\fR
+the NetBIOS name of the client machine
+(very useful).
+.TP
+\fB%L\fR
+the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you
+to change your config based on what the client calls you. Your
+server can have a "dual personality".
+
+Note that this paramater is not available when Samba listens
+on port 445, as clients no longer send this information
+.TP
+\fB%M\fR
+the Internet name of the client machine.
+.TP
+\fB%N\fR
+the name of your NIS home directory server.
+This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have
+not compiled Samba with the \fB--with-automount\fR
+option then this value will be the same as %L.
+.TP
+\fB%p\fR
+the path of the service's home directory,
+obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry
+is split up as "%N:%p".
+.TP
+\fB%R\fR
+the selected protocol level after
+protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS,
+LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.
+.TP
+\fB%d\fR
+The process id of the current server
+process.
+.TP
+\fB%a\fR
+the architecture of the remote
+machine. Only some are recognized, and those may not be
+100% reliable. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, Win95,
+WinNT and Win2k. Anything else will be known as
+"UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong then sending a level
+3 log to samba@samba.org
+ <URL:mailto:samba@samba.org> should allow it to be fixed.
+.TP
+\fB%I\fR
+The IP address of the client machine.
+.TP
+\fB%T\fR
+the current date and time.
+.TP
+\fB%$(\fIenvvar\fB)\fR
+The value of the environment variable
+\fIenvar\fR.
+.PP
+There are some quite creative things that can be done
+with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.
+.PP
+.SH "NAME MANGLING"
+.PP
+Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and
+Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format.
+It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.
+.PP
+There are several options that control the way mangling is
+performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately.
+For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program.
+.PP
+All of these options can be set separately for each service
+(or globally, of course).
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+\fBmangle case = yes/no\fR
+controls if names that have characters that
+aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example,
+if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled.
+Default \fBno\fR.
+.TP
+\fBcase sensitive = yes/no\fR
+controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If
+they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed
+names. Default \fBno\fR.
+.TP
+\fBdefault case = upper/lower\fR
+controls what the default case is for new
+filenames. Default \fBlower\fR.
+.TP
+\fBpreserve case = yes/no\fR
+controls if new files are created with the
+case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the
+"default" case. Default \fByes\fR.
+.TP
+\fBshort preserve case = yes/no\fR
+controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax,
+that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created
+upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default"
+case. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes"
+to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names
+are lowercased. Default \fByes\fR.
+.PP
+By default, Samba 2.2 has the same semantics as a Windows
+NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.
+.PP
+.SH "NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"
+.PP
+There are a number of ways in which a user can connect
+to a service. The server uses the following steps in determining
+if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the
+steps fail, then the connection request is rejected. However, if one of the
+steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked.
+.PP
+If the service is marked "guest only = yes" then
+steps 1 to 5 are skipped.
+.IP 1.
+If the client has passed a username/password
+pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX
+system's password programs then the connection is made as that
+username. Note that this includes the
+\\\\server\\service%\fIusername\fR method of passing
+a username.
+.IP 2.
+If the client has previously registered a username
+with the system and now supplies a correct password for that
+username then the connection is allowed.
+.IP 3.
+The client's NetBIOS name and any previously
+used user names are checked against the supplied password, if
+they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding
+user.
+.IP 4.
+If the client has previously validated a
+username/password pair with the server and the client has passed
+the validation token then that username is used.
+.IP 5.
+If a "user = " field is given in the
+\fIsmb.conf\fR file for the service and the client
+has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to
+the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames
+from the "user =" field then the connection is made as
+the username in the "user =" line. If one
+of the username in the "user =" list begins with a
+\&'@' then that name expands to a list of names in
+the group of the same name.
+.IP 6.
+If the service is a guest service then a
+connection is made as the username given in the "guest
+account =" for the service, irrespective of the
+supplied password.
+.SH "COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS"
+.PP
+Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of
+each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIabort shutdown script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIadd printer command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIadd share command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIadd user script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIadd machine script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIallow trusted domains\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIannounce as\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIannounce version\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIauth methods\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIauto services\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIbind interfaces only\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIbrowse list\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIchange notify timeout\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIchange share command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIconfig file\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdeadtime\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdebug hires timestamp\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdebug pid\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdebug timestamp\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdebug uid\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdebuglevel\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdefault\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdefault service\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdelete printer command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdelete share command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdelete user script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdfree command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdisable spoolss\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdns proxy\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdomain admin group\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdomain guest group\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdomain logons\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdomain master\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIencrypt passwords\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIenhanced browsing\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIenumports command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIgetwd cache\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhide local users\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhide unreadable\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhomedir map\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhost msdfs\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhosts equiv\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIinterfaces\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIkeepalive\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIkernel oplocks\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlanman auth\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlarge readwrite\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIldap admin dn\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIldap filter\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIldap port\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIldap server\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIldap ssl\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIldap suffix\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlm announce\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlm interval\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIload printers\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlocal master\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlock dir\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlock directory\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlog file\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlog level\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlogon drive\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlogon home\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlogon path\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlogon script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlpq cache time\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImachine password timeout\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImangled stack\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImap to guest\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax disk size\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax log size\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax mux\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax open files\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax protocol\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax smbd processes\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax ttl\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax wins ttl\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax xmit\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImessage command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImin passwd length\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImin password length\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImin protocol\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImin wins ttl\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIname resolve order\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInetbios aliases\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInetbios name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInetbios scope\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInis homedir\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInon unix account range\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInt pipe support\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInull passwords\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIobey pam restrictions\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIoplock break wait time\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIos level\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIos2 driver map\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpam password change\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpanic action\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpassdb backend\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpasswd chat\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpasswd chat debug\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpasswd program\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpassword level\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpassword server\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprefered master\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpreferred master\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpreload\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprintcap\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprintcap name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter driver file\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprivate dir\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprotocol\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIread bmpx\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIread raw\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIread size\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIremote announce\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIremote browse sync\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIrestrict anonymous\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIroot\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIroot dir\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIroot directory\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsecurity\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIserver string\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshow add printer wizard\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshutdown script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsmb passwd file\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsocket address\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsocket options\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsource environment\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl CA certDir\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl CA certFile\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl ciphers\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl client cert\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl client key\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl compatibility\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl egd socket\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl entropy bytes\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl entropy file\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl hosts\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl hosts resign\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl require clientcert\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl require servercert\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl server cert\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl server key\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIssl version\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstat cache\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstat cache size\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstrip dot\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsyslog\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsyslog only\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fItemplate homedir\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fItemplate shell\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fItime offset\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fItime server\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fItimestamp logs\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fItotal print jobs\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIunix extensions\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIunix password sync\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIupdate encrypted\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIuse mmap\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIuse rhosts\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIusername level\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIusername map\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIutmp\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIutmp directory\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind cache time\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind enum users\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind enum groups\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind gid\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind separator\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind uid\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwinbind use default domain\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwins hook\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwins proxy\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwins server\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwins support\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIworkgroup\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwrite raw\fR
+.SH "COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS"
+.PP
+Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on
+each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIadmin users\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIallow hosts\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIavailable\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIblocking locks\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIbrowsable\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIbrowseable\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcase sensitive\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcasesignames\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcomment\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcopy\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcreate mask\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcreate mode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdefault case\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdefault devmode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdelete readonly\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdelete veto files\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdeny hosts\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdirectory\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdirectory mask\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdirectory mode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdirectory security mask\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdont descend\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdos filemode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdos filetime resolution\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdos filetimes\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIexec\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIfake directory create times\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIfake oplocks\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIfollow symlinks\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIforce create mode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIforce directory mode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIforce directory security mode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIforce group\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIforce security mode\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIforce user\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIfstype\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIgroup\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIguest account\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIguest ok\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIguest only\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhide dot files\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhide files\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhosts allow\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIhosts deny\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIinclude\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIinherit permissions\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIinvalid users\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlevel2 oplocks\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlocking\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlppause command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlpq command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlpresume command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlprm command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImagic output\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImagic script\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImangle case\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImangled map\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImangled names\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImangling char\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImap archive\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImap hidden\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImap system\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax connections\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImax print jobs\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImin print space\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fImsdfs root\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fInt acl support\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIonly guest\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIonly user\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIoplock contention limit\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIoplocks\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpath\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIposix locking\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpostexec\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpostscript\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpreexec\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpreexec close\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpreserve case\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprint command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprint ok\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprintable\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter admin\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter driver\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter driver location\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinting\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpublic\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIqueuepause command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIqueueresume command\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIread list\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIread only\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIroot postexec\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIroot preexec\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIroot preexec close\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsecurity mask\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIset directory\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshort preserve case\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstatus\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstrict allocate\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstrict locking\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIstrict sync\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIsync always\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIuse client driver\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIuser\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIusername\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIusers\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIvalid users\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIveto files\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIveto oplock files\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIvfs object\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIvfs options\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIvolume\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwide links\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwritable\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwrite cache size\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwrite list\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwrite ok\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIwriteable\fR
+.SH "EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER"
+.TP
+\fBabort shutdown script (G)\fR
+\fBThis parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch\fR
+This a full path name to a script called by
+\fBsmbd(8)\fRthat
+should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the \fIshutdown script\fR.
+
+This command will be run as user.
+
+Default: \fBNone\fR.
+
+Example: \fBabort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c\fR
+.TP
+\fBadd printer command (G)\fR
+With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing
+support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add
+Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the
+"Printers..." folder displayed a share listing. The APW
+allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows
+NT/2000 print server.
+
+For a Samba host this means that the printer must be
+physically added to the underlying printing system. The \fIadd
+printer command\fR defines a script to be run which
+will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer
+to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition
+to the \fIsmb.conf\fR file in order that it can be
+shared by \fBsmbd(8)\fR
+.
+
+The \fIadd printer command\fR is
+automatically invoked with the following parameter (in
+order:
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIprinter name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshare name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIport name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIdriver name\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIlocation\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIWindows 9x driver location\fR
.RE
+.PP
+All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent
+by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception. The "Windows 9x
+driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility
+only. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers
+to the APW questions.
+.PP
+.PP
+Once the \fIadd printer command\fR has
+been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb.conf\fR to determine if the share defined by the APW
+exists. If the sharename is still invalid, then \fBsmbd
+\fRwill return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also \fI delete printer command\fR, \fIprinting\fR,
+\fIshow add
+printer wizard\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBaddprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter
+\fR.PP
+.TP
+\fBadd share command (G)\fR
+Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically
+add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The
+\fIadd share command\fR is used to define an
+external program or script which will add a new service definition
+to \fIsmb.conf\fR. In order to successfully
+execute the \fIadd share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR
+requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e.
+uid == 0).
+
+When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the
+\fIadd share command\fR with four parameters.
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIconfigFile\fR - the location
+of the global \fIsmb.conf\fR file.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshareName\fR - the name of the new
+share.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpathName\fR - path to an **existing**
+directory on disk.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcomment\fR - comment string to associate
+with the new share.
.RE
-
-Note that the browseable flag for auto home directories will be
-inherited from the global browseable flag, not the [homes] browseable
-flag. This is useful as it means setting browseable=no in the [homes]
-section will hide the [homes] service but make any auto home
-directories visible.
-
-.SS The [printers] section
-.RS 3
-This section works like [homes], but for printers.
-
-If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are able
-to connect to any printer specified in the local host's printcap file.
-
-When a connection request is made, the existing services are scanned. If a
-match is found, it is used. If no match is found, but a [homes] section
-exists, it is used as described above. Otherwise, the requested service name is
-treated as a printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to
-see if the requested service name is a valid printer name. If a match is
-found, a new service is created by cloning the [printers] section.
-
-A few modifications are then made to the newly created section:
-
-.RS 3
-The service name is set to the located printer name
-
-If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the located printer
-name
-
-If the service does not permit guest access and no username was given, the
-username is set to the located printer name.
+.PP
+This parameter is only used for add file shares. To add printer shares,
+see the \fIadd printer
+command\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also \fIchange share
+command\fR, \fIdelete share
+command\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBadd share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBadd machine script (G)\fR
+This is the full pathname to a script that will
+be run by smbd(8)when a machine is added
+to it's domain using the administrator username and password method.
+
+This option is only required when using sam back-ends tied to the
+Unix uid method of RID calculation such as smbpasswd. This option is only
+available in Samba 3.0.
+
+Default: \fBadd machine script = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBadd machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /dev/null -s /bin/false %u
+\fR.TP
+\fBadd user script (G)\fR
+This is the full pathname to a script that will
+be run \fBAS ROOT\fR by smbd(8)
+under special circumstances described below.
+
+Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are
+created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites
+that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database
+creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the
+Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows smbdto create the required UNIX users
+\fBON DEMAND\fR when a user accesses the Samba server.
+
+In order to use this option, smbd
+must \fBNOT\fR be set to \fIsecurity = share\fR
+and \fIadd user script\fR
+must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX
+user given one argument of \fI%u\fR, which expands into
+the UNIX user name to create.
+
+When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server,
+at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, smbdcontacts the \fIpassword server\fR and
+attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the
+authentication succeeds then \fBsmbd\fR
+attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the
+Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and \fIadd user script
+\fRis set then \fBsmbd\fR will
+call the specified script \fBAS ROOT\fR, expanding
+any \fI%u\fR argument to be the user name to create.
+
+If this script successfully creates the user then \fBsmbd
+\fRwill continue on as though the UNIX user
+already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to
+match existing Windows NT accounts.
+
+See also \fI security\fR, \fIpassword server\fR,
+\fIdelete user
+script\fR.
+
+Default: \fBadd user script = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBadd user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user
+%u\fR
+.TP
+\fBadmin users (S)\fR
+This is a list of users who will be granted
+administrative privileges on the share. This means that they
+will do all file operations as the super-user (root).
+
+You should use this option very carefully, as any user in
+this list will be able to do anything they like on the share,
+irrespective of file permissions.
+
+Default: \fBno admin users\fR
+
+Example: \fBadmin users = jason\fR
+.TP
+\fBallow hosts (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fIhosts allow\fR.
+.TP
+\fBallow trusted domains (G)\fR
+This option only takes effect when the \fIsecurity\fR option is set to
+server or domain.
+If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from
+a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbdis running
+in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server
+doing the authentication.
+
+This is useful if you only want your Samba server to
+serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As
+an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB. DOMB
+is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server. Under normal
+circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the
+resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the
+Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This
+can make implementing a security boundary difficult.
+
+Default: \fBallow trusted domains = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBannounce as (G)\fR
+This specifies what type of server
+\fBnmbd\fR
+will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse
+list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options
+are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"),
+"NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server,
+Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups
+respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a
+specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this
+may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers
+correctly.
+
+Default: \fBannounce as = NT Server\fR
+
+Example: \fBannounce as = Win95\fR
+.TP
+\fBannounce version (G)\fR
+This specifies the major and minor version numbers
+that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default
+is 4.2. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific
+need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.
+
+Default: \fBannounce version = 4.5\fR
+
+Example: \fBannounce version = 2.0\fR
+.TP
+\fBauto services (G)\fR
+This is a synonym for the \fIpreload\fR.
+.TP
+\fBauth methods (G)\fR
+This option allows the administrator to chose what
+authentication methods \fBsmbd\fR will use when authenticating
+a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on \fI security\fR.
+Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn, until
+the user authenticates. In practice only one method will ever actually
+be able to complete the authentication.
+
+Default: \fBauth methods = <empty string>\fR
+
+Example: \fBauth methods = guest sam ntdomain\fR
+.TP
+\fBavailable (S)\fR
+This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If
+\fIavailable = no\fR, then \fBALL\fR
+attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are
+logged.
+
+Default: \fBavailable = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBbind interfaces only (G)\fR
+This global parameter allows the Samba admin
+to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. If
+affects file service smbd(8)and
+name service nmbd(8)in slightly
+different ways.
+
+For name service it causes \fBnmbd\fR to bind
+to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter. \fBnmbd
+\fRalso binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0)
+on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages.
+If this option is not set then \fBnmbd\fR will service
+name requests on all of these sockets. If \fIbind interfaces
+only\fR is set then \fBnmbd\fR will check the
+source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets
+and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the
+interfaces in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list.
+As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows
+\fBnmbd\fR to refuse to serve names to machines that
+send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the
+\fIinterfaces\fR list. IP Source address spoofing
+does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used
+seriously as a security feature for \fBnmbd\fR.
+
+For file service it causes smbd(8)
+to bind only to the interface list given in the interfaces parameter. This restricts the networks that
+\fBsmbd\fR will serve to packets coming in those
+interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines
+that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network
+interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.
+
+If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then
+unless the network address \fB127.0.0.1\fR is added
+to the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list \fBsmbpasswd(8)\fR
+and \fBswat(8)\fRmay
+not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.
+
+To change a users SMB password, the \fBsmbpasswd\fR
+by default connects to the \fBlocalhost - 127.0.0.1\fR
+address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If
+\fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then unless the
+network address \fB127.0.0.1\fR is added to the
+\fIinterfaces\fR parameter list then \fB smbpasswd\fR will fail to connect in it's default mode.
+\fBsmbpasswd\fR can be forced to use the primary IP interface
+of the local host by using its \fI-r remote machine\fR
+parameter, with \fIremote machine\fR set
+to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.
+
+The \fBswat\fR status page tries to connect with
+\fBsmbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR at the address
+\fB127.0.0.1\fR to determine if they are running.
+Not adding \fB127.0.0.1\fR will cause \fB smbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR to always show
+"not running" even if they really are. This can prevent \fB swat\fR from starting/stopping/restarting \fBsmbd\fR
+and \fBnmbd\fR.
+
+Default: \fBbind interfaces only = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBblocking locks (S)\fR
+This parameter controls the behavior of smbd(8)when given a request by a client
+to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the
+request has a time limit associated with it.
+
+If this parameter is set and the lock range requested
+cannot be immediately satisfied, Samba 2.2 will internally
+queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain
+the lock until the timeout period expires.
+
+If this parameter is set to false, then
+Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and
+will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range
+cannot be obtained.
+
+Default: \fBblocking locks = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBbrowsable (S)\fR
+See the \fI browseable\fR.
+.TP
+\fBbrowse list (G)\fR
+This controls whether \fBsmbd(8)\fRwill serve a browse list to
+a client doing a \fBNetServerEnum\fR call. Normally
+set to true. You should never need to change
+this.
+
+Default: \fBbrowse list = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBbrowseable (S)\fR
+This controls whether this share is seen in
+the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.
+
+Default: \fBbrowseable = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBcase sensitive (S)\fR
+See the discussion in the section NAME MANGLING.
+
+Default: \fBcase sensitive = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBcasesignames (S)\fR
+Synonym for case
+sensitive.
+.TP
+\fBchange notify timeout (G)\fR
+This SMB allows a client to tell a server to
+"watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to
+the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of
+a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an \fBsmbd(8)\fRdaemon only performs such a scan
+on each requested directory once every \fIchange notify
+timeout\fR seconds.
+
+Default: \fBchange notify timeout = 60\fR
+
+Example: \fBchange notify timeout = 300\fR
+
+Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes.
+.TP
+\fBchange share command (G)\fR
+Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically
+add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The
+\fIchange share command\fR is used to define an
+external program or script which will modify an existing service definition
+in \fIsmb.conf\fR. In order to successfully
+execute the \fIchange share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR
+requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e.
+uid == 0).
+
+When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the
+\fIchange share command\fR with four parameters.
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIconfigFile\fR - the location
+of the global \fIsmb.conf\fR file.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshareName\fR - the name of the new
+share.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIpathName\fR - path to an **existing**
+directory on disk.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIcomment\fR - comment string to associate
+with the new share.
.RE
-
-Note that the [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify otherwise,
-the server will refuse to load the configuration file.
-
-Typically the path specified would be that of a world-writable spool directory
-with the sticky bit set on it. A typical [printers] entry would look like this:
-
- [printers]
- path = /usr/spool/public
- writable = no
- public = yes
- printable = yes
-
-All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer
-names as far as the server is concerned. If your printing subsystem doesn't
-work like that, you will have to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file
-consisting of one or more lines like this:
-
- alias|alias|alias|alias...
-
-Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing
-subsystem. In the [global] section, specify the new file as your printcap.
-The server will then only recognise names found in your pseudo-printcap,
-which of course can contain whatever aliases you like. The same technique
-could be used simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers.
-
-An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a
-printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, components (if there are
-more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols ("|").
-.SH PARAMETERS
-Parameters define the specific attributes of services.
-
-Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (eg., security).
-Some parameters are usable in all sections (eg., create mode). All others are
-permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following
-descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be considered normal.
-The letter 'G' in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the
-[global] section. The letter 'S' indicates that a parameter can be
-specified in a secvice specific section. Note that all S parameters
-can also be specified in the [global] section - in which case they
-will define the default behaviour for all services.
-
-Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create
-best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are synonyms,
-the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred synonym.
-
-.SS VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS
-
-Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take
-substitutions. For example the option "path = /tmp/%u" would be
-interpreted as "path = /tmp/john" if the user connected with the
-username john.
-
-These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but
-there are some general substitions which apply whenever they might be
-relevant. These are:
-
-%S = the name of the current service, if any
-
-%P = the root directory of the current service, if any
-
-%u = user name of the current service, if any
-
-%g = primary group name of %u
-
-%U = session user name (the user name that the client wanted, not
-necessarily the same as the one they got)
-
-%G = primary group name of %U
-
-%H = the home directory of the user given by %u
-
-%v = the Samba version
-
-%h = the hostname that Samba is running on
-
-%m = the netbios name of the client machine (very useful)
-
-%L = the netbios name of the server. This allows you to change your
-config based on what the client calls you. Your server can have a "dual
-personality".
-
-%M = the internet name of the client machine
-
-%d = The process id of the current server process
-
-%a = the architecture of the remote machine. Only some are recognised,
-and those may not be 100% reliable. It currently recognises Samba,
-WfWg, WinNT and Win95. Anything else will be known as "UNKNOWN". If it
-gets it wrong then sending me a level 3 log should allow me to fix it.
-
-%I = The IP address of the client machine
-
-%T = the current date and time
-
-There are some quite creative things that can be done with these
-substitutions and other smb.conf options.
-
-.SS NAME MANGLING
-
-Samba supports "name mangling" so that Dos and Windows clients can use
-files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. It can also be set to adjust
-the case of 8.3 format filenames.
-
-There are several options that control the way mangling is performed,
-and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. For the
-defaults look at the output of the testparm program.
-
-All of these options can be set separately for each service (or
-globally, of course).
-
-The options are:
-
-"mangle case = yes/no" controls if names that have characters that
-aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, if this is yes
-then a name like "Mail" would be mangled. Default no.
-
-"case sensitive = yes/no" controls whether filenames are case
-sensitive. If they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and
-match on passed names. Default no.
-
-"default case = upper/lower" controls what the default case is for new
-filenames. Default lower.
-
-"preserve case = yes/no" controls if new files are created with the
-case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the "default"
-case. Default no.
-
-"short preserve case = yes/no" controls if new files which conform to 8.3
-syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created
-upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" case. This option can
-be use with "preserve case = yes" to permit long filenames to retain their
-case, while short names are lowered. Default no.
-
-.SS COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETER
-
-Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of each
-parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
-
-auto services
-
-config file
-
-deadtime
-
-debuglevel
-
-default
-
-default service
-
-dfree command
-
-encrypt passwords
-
-getwd cache
-
-hosts equiv
-
-include
-
-keepalive
-
-lock dir
-
-load printers
-
-lock directory
-
-log file
-
-log level
-
-lpq cache time
-
-mangled stack
-
-max log size
-
-max packet
-
-max xmit
-
-message command
-
-null passwords
-
-os level
-
-packet size
-
-passwd chat
-
-passwd program
-
-password level
-
-password server
-
-preferred master
-
-preload
-
-printing
-
-printcap name
-
-protocol
-
-read bmpx
-
-read prediction
-
-read raw
-
-read size
-
-root
-
-root dir
-
-root directory
-
-security
-
-server string
-
-smbrun
-
-socket options
-
-status
-
-strip dot
-
-time offset
-
-username map
-
-use rhosts
-
-valid chars
-
-workgroup
-
-write raw
-
-.SS COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETER
-
-Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section of each
-parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
-
-admin users
-
-allow hosts
-
-alternate permissions
-
-available
-
-browseable
-
-case sensitive
-
-case sig names
-
-copy
-
-create mask
-
-create mode
-
-comment
-
-default case
-
-deny hosts
-
-directory
-
-dont descend
-
-exec
-
-force group
-
-force user
-
-guest account
-
-guest ok
-
-guest only
-
-hide dot files
-
-hosts allow
-
-hosts deny
-
-invalid users
-
-locking
-
-lppause command
-
-lpq command
-
-lpresume command
-
-lprm command
-
-magic output
-
-magic script
-
-mangle case
-
-mangled names
-
-mangling char
-
-map archive
-
-map hidden
-
-map system
-
-max connections
-
-min print space
-
-only guest
-
-only user
-
-path
-
-postexec
-
-postscript
-
-preserve case
-
-print command
-
-print ok
-
-printable
-
-printer
-
-printer name
-
-public
-
-read only
-
-read list
-
-revalidate
-
-root postexec
-
-root preexec
-
-set directory
-
-share modes
-
-short preserve case
-
-strict locking
-
-sync always
-
-user
-
-username
-
-users
-
-valid users
-
-volume
-
-wide links
-
-writable
-
-write ok
-
-writeable
-
-write list
-
-.SS EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER
-.RS 3
-
-.SS admin users (G)
-
-This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privilages
-on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the
-super-user (root).
-
-You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list
-will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of
-file permissions.
-
-.B Default:
- no admin users
-
-.B Example:
- admin users = jason
-
-.SS auto services (G)
-This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to
-the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services
-that would otherwise not be visible.
-
-Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded
-then the "load printers" option is easier.
-
-.B Default:
- no auto services
-
-.B Example:
- auto services = fred lp colorlp
-
-
-.SS allow hosts (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'hosts allow'.
-
-This parameter is a comma delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access
-a services. If specified in the [global] section, matching hosts will be
-allowed access to any service that does not specifically exclude them from
-access. Specific services my have their own list, which override those
-specified in the [global] section.
-
-You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For example, you could
-restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with something like
-"allow hosts = 150.203.5.". The full syntax of the list is described in
-the man page
-.B hosts_access(5).
-
-You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup
-names if your system supports netgroups. The EXCEPT keyword can also
-be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide
-some help:
-
-Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.* except one
-
- hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66
-
-Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask
-
- hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0
-
-Example 3: allow a couple of hosts
-
- hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur
-
-Example 4: allow only hosts in netgroup "foonet" or localhost, but
-deny access from one particular host
-
- hosts allow = @foonet, localhost
- hosts deny = pirate
-
-Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.
-
-See testparm(1) for a way of testing your host access to see if it
-does what you expect.
-
-.B Default:
- none (ie., all hosts permitted access)
-
-.B Example:
- allow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au
-
-.SS alternate permissions (S)
-
-This option affects the way the "read only" DOS attribute is produced
-for unix files. If this is false then the read only bit is set for
-files on writeable shares which the user cannot write to.
-
-If this is true then it is set for files whos user write bit is not set.
-
-The latter behaviour of useful for when users copy files from each
-others directories, and use a file manager that preserves
-permissions. Without this option they may get annoyed as all copied
-files will have the "read only" bit set.
-
-.B Default:
- alternate permissions = no
-
-.B Example:
- alternate permissions = yes
-
-.SS available (S)
-This parameter lets you 'turn off' a service. If 'available = no', then
-ALL attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are logged.
-
-.B Default:
- available = yes
-
-.B Example:
- available = no
-.SS browseable (S)
-This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available
-shares in a net view and in the browse list.
-
-.B Default:
- browseable = Yes
-
-.B Example:
- browseable = No
-
-.SS case sig names (G)
-See "case sensitive"
-
-.SS comment (S)
-This is a text field that is seen when a client does a net view to
-list what shares are available. It will also be used when browsing is
-fully supported.
-
-.B Default:
- No comment string
-
-.B Example:
- comment = Fred's Files
-
-.SS config file (G)
-
-This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the
-default (usually smb.conf). There is a chicken and egg problem here as
-this option is set in the config file!
-
-For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when the
-parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new config
-file.
-
-This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very useful.
-
-If thew config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded (allowing
-you to special case the config files of just a few clients).
-
-.B Example:
- config file = /usr/local/samba/smb.conf.%m
-
-.SS copy (S)
-This parameter allows you to 'clone' service entries. The specified
-service is simply duplicated under the current service's name. Any
-parameters specified in the current section will override those in the
-section being copied.
-
-This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and create similar
-services easily. Note that the service being copied must occur earlier
-in the configuration file than the service doing the copying.
-
-.B Default:
- none
-
-.B Example:
- copy = otherservice
-.SS create mask (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'create mode'.
-
-This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes
-to Unix modes.
-
-Note that Samba will or this value with 0700 as you must have at least
-user read, write and execute for Samba to work properly.
-
-.B Default:
- create mask = 0755
-
-.B Example:
- create mask = 0775
-.SS create mode (S)
-See
-.B create mask.
-.SS dead time (G)
-The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of
-minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it
-is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files
-is zero.
-
-This is useful to stop a server's resources being exhausted by a large
-number of inactive connections.
-
-Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a connection is broken so
-in most cases this parameter should be transparent to users.
-
-Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended
-for most systems.
-
-A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection should be performed.
-
-.B Default:
- dead time = 0
-
-.B Example:
- dead time = 15
-.SS debug level (G)
-The value of the parameter (an integer) allows the debug level
-(logging level) to be specified in the smb.conf file. This is to give
-greater flexibility in the configuration of the system.
-
-The default will be the debug level specified on the command line.
-
-.B Example:
- debug level = 3
-.SS default (G)
-See
-.B default service.
-.SS default case (S)
-
-See the section on "NAME MANGLING" Also note the addition of "short
-preserve case"
-
-.SS default service (G)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'default'.
-
-This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to
-if the service actually requested cannot be found. Note that the square
-brackets are NOT given in the parameter value (see example below).
-
-There is no default value for this parameter. If this parameter is not given,
-attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an error.
-
-Typically the default service would be a public, read-only service.
-
-Also not that s of 1.9.14 the apparent service name will be changed to
-equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows
-you to use macros like %S to make a wildcard service.
-
-Note also that any _ characters in the name of the service used in the
-default service will get mapped to a /. This allows for interesting
-things.
-
-
-.B Example:
- default service = pub
+.PP
+This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions. To modify
+printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also \fIadd share
+command\fR, \fIdelete
+share command\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBchange share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBcomment (S)\fR
+This is a text field that is seen next to a share
+when a client does a queries the server, either via the network
+neighborhood or via \fBnet view\fR to list what shares
+are available.
+
+If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the
+machine name then see the \fI server string\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBNo comment string\fR
+
+Example: \fBcomment = Fred's Files\fR
+.TP
+\fBconfig file (G)\fR
+This allows you to override the config file
+to use, instead of the default (usually \fIsmb.conf\fR).
+There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set
+in the config file!
+
+For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed
+when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from
+the new config file.
+
+This option takes the usual substitutions, which can
+be very useful.
+
+If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded
+(allowing you to special case the config files of just a few
+clients).
+
+Example: \fBconfig file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m
+\fR.TP
+\fBcopy (S)\fR
+This parameter allows you to "clone" service
+entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the
+current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current
+section will override those in the section being copied.
+
+This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and
+create similar services easily. Note that the service being
+copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the
+service doing the copying.
+
+Default: \fBno value\fR
+
+Example: \fBcopy = otherservice\fR
+.TP
+\fBcreate mask (S)\fR
+A synonym for this parameter is
+\fIcreate mode\fR
+\&.
+
+When a file is created, the necessary permissions are
+calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX
+permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed
+with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise
+MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit \fBnot\fR
+set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is
+created.
+
+The default value of this parameter removes the
+\&'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.
+
+Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created
+from this parameter with the value of the \fIforce create mode\fR
+parameter which is set to 000 by default.
+
+This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the
+parameter \fIdirectory mode
+\fRfor details.
+
+See also the \fIforce
+create mode\fR parameter for forcing particular mode
+bits to be set on created files. See also the \fIdirectory mode\fR parameter for masking
+mode bits on created directories. See also the \fIinherit permissions\fR parameter.
+
+Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions
+set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce
+a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the \fIsecurity mask\fR.
+
+Default: \fBcreate mask = 0744\fR
+
+Example: \fBcreate mask = 0775\fR
+.TP
+\fBcreate mode (S)\fR
+This is a synonym for \fI create mask\fR.
+.TP
+\fBdeadtime (G)\fR
+The value of the parameter (a decimal integer)
+represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection
+is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes
+effect if the number of open files is zero.
+
+This is useful to stop a server's resources being
+exhausted by a large number of inactive connections.
+
+Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a
+connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be
+transparent to users.
+
+Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes
+is recommended for most systems.
+
+A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection
+should be performed.
+
+Default: \fBdeadtime = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBdeadtime = 15\fR
+.TP
+\fBdebug hires timestamp (G)\fR
+Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages
+are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this
+boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp
+message header when turned on.
+
+Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an
+effect.
+
+Default: \fBdebug hires timestamp = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdebug pid (G)\fR
+When using only one log file for more then one
+forked smbd-process there may be hard to follow which process
+outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id
+to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.
+
+Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an
+effect.
+
+Default: \fBdebug pid = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdebug timestamp (G)\fR
+Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped
+by default. If you are running at a high \fIdebug level\fR these timestamps
+can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping
+to be turned off.
+
+Default: \fBdebug timestamp = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBdebug uid (G)\fR
+Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime
+run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the
+current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers
+in the log file if turned on.
+
+Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an
+effect.
+
+Default: \fBdebug uid = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdebuglevel (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fI log level\fR.
+.TP
+\fBdefault (G)\fR
+A synonym for \fI default service\fR.
+.TP
+\fBdefault case (S)\fR
+See the section on NAME MANGLING. Also note the \fIshort preserve case\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBdefault case = lower\fR
+.TP
+\fBdefault devmode (S)\fR
+This parameter is only applicable to printable services. When smbd is serving
+Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba
+server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and
+orientation and duplex settings. The device mode can only correctly be
+generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a
+Win32 platform). Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code
+to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to set this field
+to NULL.
+
+Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients
+can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode. Certain drivers
+will do things such as crashing the client's Explorer.exe with a NULL devmode.
+However, other printer drivers can cause the client's spooler service
+(spoolsv.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself
+(i.e. smbd generates a default devmode).
+
+This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer
+driver in question. It is better to leave the device mode to NULL
+and let the Windows client set the correct values. Because drivers do not
+do this all the time, setting \fBdefault devmode = yes\fR
+will instruct smbd to generate a default one.
+
+For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes,
+see the MSDN documentation <URL:http://msdn.microsoft.com/>.
+
+Default: \fBdefault devmode = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdefault service (G)\fR
+This parameter specifies the name of a service
+which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot
+be found. Note that the square brackets are \fBNOT\fR
+given in the parameter value (see example below).
+
+There is no default value for this parameter. If this
+parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent
+service results in an error.
+
+Typically the default service would be a \fIguest ok\fR, \fIread-only\fR service.
+
+Also note that the apparent service name will be changed
+to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it
+allows you to use macros like \fI%S\fR to make
+a wildcard service.
+
+Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service
+used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for
+interesting things.
+
+Example:
+
+.sp
+.nf
+[global]
+ default service = pub
- [pub]
- path = /%S
-
-
-.SS deny hosts (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'hosts deny'.
-
-The opposite of 'allow hosts' - hosts listed here are NOT permitted
-access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to
-override this one. Where the lists conflict, the 'allow' list takes precedence.
-
-.B Default:
- none (ie., no hosts specifically excluded)
-
-.B Example:
- deny hosts = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au
-.SS dfree command (G)
-The dfree command setting should only be used on systems where a
-problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has
-been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating
-systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry
-Ignore" at the end of each directory listing.
+[pub]
+ path = /%S
+
+.sp
+.fi
+.TP
+\fBdelete printer command (G)\fR
+With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer
+support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now
+possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the
+DeletePrinter() RPC call.
+
+For a Samba host this means that the printer must be
+physically deleted from underlying printing system. The \fI deleteprinter command\fR defines a script to be run which
+will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer
+from the print system and from \fIsmb.conf\fR.
+
+The \fIdelete printer command\fR is
+automatically called with only one parameter: \fI "printer name"\fR.
+
+Once the \fIdelete printer command\fR has
+been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb.conf\fR to associated printer no longer exists.
+If the sharename is still valid, then \fBsmbd
+\fRwill return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.
+
+See also \fI add printer command\fR, \fIprinting\fR,
+\fIshow add
+printer wizard\fR
+
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+
+Example: \fBdeleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter
+\fR.TP
+\fBdelete readonly (S)\fR
+This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted.
+This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.
+
+This option may be useful for running applications such
+as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file
+permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.
+
+Default: \fBdelete readonly = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdelete share command (G)\fR
+Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically
+add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The
+\fIdelete share command\fR is used to define an
+external program or script which will remove an existing service
+definition from \fIsmb.conf\fR. In order to successfully
+execute the \fIdelete share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR
+requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e.
+uid == 0).
+
+When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the
+\fIdelete share command\fR with two parameters.
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIconfigFile\fR - the location
+of the global \fIsmb.conf\fR file.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fIshareName\fR - the name of
+the existing service.
+.RE
+.PP
+This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer shares,
+see the \fIdelete printer
+command\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also \fIadd share
+command\fR, \fIchange
+share command\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBdelete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBdelete user script (G)\fR
+This is the full pathname to a script that will
+be run \fBAS ROOT\fR by \fBsmbd(8)\fRunder special circumstances
+described below.
+
+Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are
+created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites
+that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database
+creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the
+Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows \fB smbd\fR to delete the required UNIX users \fBON
+DEMAND\fR when a user accesses the Samba server and the
+Windows NT user no longer exists.
+
+In order to use this option, \fBsmbd\fR must be
+set to \fIsecurity = domain\fR or \fIsecurity =
+user\fR and \fIdelete user script\fR
+must be set to a full pathname for a script
+that will delete a UNIX user given one argument of \fI%u\fR,
+which expands into the UNIX user name to delete.
+
+When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server,
+at \fBlogin\fR (session setup in the SMB protocol)
+time, \fBsmbd\fR contacts the \fIpassword server\fR and attempts to authenticate
+the given user with the given password. If the authentication fails
+with the specific Domain error code meaning that the user no longer
+exists then \fBsmbd\fR attempts to find a UNIX user in
+the UNIX password database that matches the Windows user account. If
+this lookup succeeds, and \fIdelete user script\fR is
+set then \fBsmbd\fR will all the specified script
+\fBAS ROOT\fR, expanding any \fI%u\fR
+argument to be the user name to delete.
+
+This script should delete the given UNIX username. In this way,
+UNIX users are dynamically deleted to match existing Windows NT
+accounts.
+
+See also security = domain,
+\fIpassword server\fR
+, \fIadd user script\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBdelete user script = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBdelete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user
+%u\fR
+.TP
+\fBdelete veto files (S)\fR
+This option is used when Samba is attempting to
+delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories
+(see the \fIveto files\fR
+option). If this option is set to false (the default) then if a vetoed
+directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the
+directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.
+
+If this option is set to true, then Samba
+will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within
+the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file
+serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within
+directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing
+(e.g. \fI.AppleDouble\fR)
+
+Setting \fBdelete veto files = yes\fR allows these
+directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory
+is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).
+
+See also the \fIveto
+files\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBdelete veto files = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdeny hosts (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fIhosts
+deny\fR.
+.TP
+\fBdfree command (G)\fR
+The \fIdfree command\fR setting should
+only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal
+disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix,
+but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was
+seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each
+directory listing.
This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to
calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external
routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill
-this function.
-
-The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a
-directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist
-of the string "./". The script should return two integers in ascii. The
-first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the second should
-be the number of available blocks. An optional third return value
-can give the block size in bytes. The default blocksize is 1024 bytes.
-
-Note: Your script should NOT be setuid or setgid and should be owned by
-(and writable only by) root!
-
-.B Default:
- By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity
-and remaining space will be used.
-
-.B Example:
- dfree command = /usr/local/smb/dfree
-
- Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be
-
- #!/bin/sh
- df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'
-
- or perhaps (on Sys V)
-
- #!/bin/sh
- /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
-
-
- Note that you may have to replace the command names with full
-path names on some systems.
-.SS directory (S)
-See
-.B path.
-.SS dont descend (S)
-There are certain directories on some systems (eg., the /proc tree under
-Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep
-(recursive). This parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list
-of directories that the server should always show as empty.
-
-Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the "dont
-descend" entries. For example you ma need "./proc" instead of just
-"/proc". Experimentation is the best policy :-)
-
-.B Default:
- none (ie., all directories are OK to descend)
-
-.B Example:
- dont descend = /proc,/dev
-
-.SS encrypt passwords (G)
-
-This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated
-with the cient. Note that this option has no effect if you haven't
-compiled in the necessary des libraries and encryption code. It
-defaults to no.
-
-.SS exec (S)
-
-This is an alias for preexec
-
-
-.SS force group (S)
-This specifies a group name that all connections to this service
-should be made as. This may be useful for sharing files.
-
-.B Default:
- no forced group
-
-.B Example:
- force group = agroup
-
-.SS force user (S)
-This specifies a user name that all connections to this service
-should be made as. This may be useful for sharing files. You should
-also use it carefully as using it incorrectly can cause security
-problems.
-
-This user name only gets used once a connection is established. Thus
-clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a valid
-password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed as the
-"forced user", not matter what username the client connected as.
-
-.B Default:
- no forced user
-
-.B Example:
- force user = auser
+this function.
+
+The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating
+a directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist
+of the string \fI./\fR. The script should return two
+integers in ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks,
+and the second should be the number of available blocks. An optional
+third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default
+blocksize is 1024 bytes.
+
+Note: Your script should \fBNOT\fR be setuid or
+setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!
+
+Default: \fBBy default internal routines for
+determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used.
+\fR
+Example: \fBdfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree
+\fR
+Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:
+
+.sp
+.nf
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'
+
+.sp
+.fi
+
+or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
+
+.sp
+.nf
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
+
+.sp
+.fi
+
+Note that you may have to replace the command names
+with full path names on some systems.
+.TP
+\fBdirectory (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fIpath
+\fR\&.
+.TP
+\fBdirectory mask (S)\fR
+This parameter is the octal modes which are
+used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX
+directories.
+
+When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are
+calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions,
+and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this
+parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for
+the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit \fBnot\fR set
+here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is
+created.
+
+The default value of this parameter removes the 'group'
+and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the
+user who owns the directory to modify it.
+
+Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode
+created from this parameter with the value of the \fIforce directory mode
+\fRparameter. This parameter is set to 000 by
+default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).
+
+Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions
+set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce
+a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the \fIdirectory security mask\fR.
+
+See the \fIforce
+directory mode\fR parameter to cause particular mode
+bits to always be set on created directories.
+
+See also the \fIcreate mode
+\fRparameter for masking mode bits on created files,
+and the \fIdirectory
+security mask\fR parameter.
+
+Also refer to the \fI inherit permissions\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBdirectory mask = 0755\fR
+
+Example: \fBdirectory mask = 0775\fR
+.TP
+\fBdirectory mode (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fI directory mask\fR
+.TP
+\fBdirectory security mask (S)\fR
+This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits
+can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX
+permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog
+box.
+
+This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to
+the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in
+this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this
+mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed
+to change.
+
+If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777
+meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world
+permissions on a directory.
+
+\fBNote\fR that users who can access the
+Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction,
+so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.
+Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
+it as the default of 0777.
+
+See also the \fI force directory security mode\fR, \fIsecurity mask\fR,
+\fIforce security mode
+\fRparameters.
+
+Default: \fBdirectory security mask = 0777\fR
+
+Example: \fBdirectory security mask = 0700\fR
+.TP
+\fBdisable spoolss (G)\fR
+Enabling this parameter will disables Samba's support
+for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior
+as Samba 2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using
+Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be uneffected by
+the parameter. However, this will also disable the ability to upload
+printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer
+Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window. It will
+also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download
+print drivers from the Samba host upon demand.
+\fBBe very careful about enabling this parameter.\fR
+
+See also use client driver
+
+Default : \fBdisable spoolss = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdns proxy (G)\fR
+Specifies that nmbd(8)
+when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not
+been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS
+name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of
+the name-querying client.
+
+Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15
+characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be
+15 characters, maximum.
+
+\fBnmbd\fR spawns a second copy of itself to do the
+DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking
+action.
+
+See also the parameter \fI wins support\fR.
+
+Default: \fBdns proxy = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBdomain admin group (G)\fR
+This parameter is intended as a temporary solution
+to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Admins" group when
+a Samba host is acting as a PDC. A complete solution will be provided
+by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups.
+Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name. It
+accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard
+\fIsmb.conf\fR notation.
+
+See also \fIdomain
+guest group\fR, \fIdomain
+logons\fR
+
+Default: \fBno domain administrators\fR
+
+Example: \fBdomain admin group = root @wheel\fR
+.TP
+\fBdomain guest group (G)\fR
+This parameter is intended as a temporary solution
+to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Guests" group when
+a Samba host is acting as a PDC. A complete solution will be provided
+by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups.
+Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name. It
+accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard
+\fIsmb.conf\fR notation.
+
+See also \fIdomain
+admin group\fR, \fIdomain
+logons\fR
+
+Default: \fBno domain guests\fR
+
+Example: \fBdomain guest group = nobody @guest\fR
+.TP
+\fBdomain logons (G)\fR
+If set to true, the Samba server will serve
+Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the \fIworkgroup\fR it is in. Samba 2.2 also
+has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows
+NT 4 Domains. For more details on setting up this feature see
+the Samba-PDC-HOWTO included in the \fIhtmldocs/\fR
+directory shipped with the source code.
+
+Default: \fBdomain logons = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdomain master (G)\fR
+Tell \fB nmbd(8)\fRto enable WAN-wide browse list
+collation. Setting this option causes \fBnmbd\fR to
+claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies
+it as a domain master browser for its given \fIworkgroup\fR. Local master browsers
+in the same \fIworkgroup\fR on broadcast-isolated
+subnets will give this \fBnmbd\fR their local browse lists,
+and then ask \fBsmbd(8)\fR
+for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area
+network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser,
+and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list
+for their broadcast-isolated subnet.
+
+Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be
+able to claim this \fIworkgroup\fR specific special
+NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for
+that \fIworkgroup\fR by default (i.e. there is no
+way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This
+means that if this parameter is set and \fBnmbd\fR claims
+the special name for a \fIworkgroup\fR before a Windows
+NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave
+strangely and may fail.
+
+If \fBdomain logons = yes\fR
+, then the default behavior is to enable the \fIdomain
+master\fR parameter. If \fIdomain logons\fR is
+not enabled (the default setting), then neither will \fIdomain
+master\fR be enabled by default.
+
+Default: \fBdomain master = auto\fR
+.TP
+\fBdont descend (S)\fR
+There are certain directories on some systems
+(e.g., the \fI/proc\fR tree under Linux) that are either not
+of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This
+parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories
+that the server should always show as empty.
+
+Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format
+of the "dont descend" entries. For example you may need \fI ./proc\fR instead of just \fI/proc\fR.
+Experimentation is the best policy :-)
+
+Default: \fBnone (i.e., all directories are OK
+to descend)\fR
+
+Example: \fBdont descend = /proc,/dev\fR
+.TP
+\fBdos filemode (S)\fR
+The default behavior in Samba is to provide
+UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is
+able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior
+is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter
+allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever
+means) to modify the permissions on it. Note that a user
+belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to
+change permissions if the group is only granted read access.
+Ownership of the file/directory is not changed, only the permissions
+are modified.
+
+Default: \fBdos filemode = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdos filetime resolution (S)\fR
+Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest
+granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter
+for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the
+nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second
+resolution is made to \fBsmbd(8)\fR
+.
+
+This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual
+C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a
+share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a
+file has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a
+one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As
+the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a
+timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not
+match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting
+this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is
+happy.
+
+Default: \fBdos filetime resolution = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBdos filetimes (S)\fR
+Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a
+file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics,
+only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By
+default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the
+timestamp on a file if the user \fBsmbd\fR is acting
+on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to true allows DOS semantics and smbdwill change the file
+timestamp as DOS requires.
+
+Default: \fBdos filetimes = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBencrypt passwords (G)\fR
+This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords
+will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and
+above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords
+unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in
+Samba see the file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation
+directory \fIdocs/\fR shipped with the source code.
+
+In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly
+\fBsmbd(8)\fRmust either
+have access to a local \fIsmbpasswd(5)
+\fRprogram for information on how to set up
+and maintain this file), or set the security = [server|domain|ads] parameter which
+causes \fBsmbd\fR to authenticate against another
+server.
-.SS guest account (S)
-This is a username which will be used for access to services which are
-specified as 'guest ok' (see below). Whatever privileges this user has
-will be available to any client connecting to the guest
-service. Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will
-not have a valid login. If a username is specified in a given service,
+Default: \fBencrypt passwords = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBenhanced browsing (G)\fR
+This option enables a couple of enhancements to
+cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba
+but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations.
+
+The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular
+wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers,
+followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned
+DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse
+synchronization with all currently known DMBs.
+
+You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty
+workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the restrictions
+of the browse protocols these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup
+to stay around forever which can be annoying.
+
+In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes
+cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.
+
+Default: \fBenhanced browsing = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBenumports command (G)\fR
+The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign
+to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port
+is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of
+a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port
+(i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...). By default, Samba has only one
+port defined--"Samba Printer Port". Under
+Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name.
+If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (\fBsmbd
+\fRdoes not use a port name for anything) other than
+the default "Samba Printer Port", you
+can define \fIenumports command\fR to point to
+a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line,
+to standard output. This listing will then be used in response
+to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.
+
+Default: \fBno enumports command\fR
+
+Example: \fBenumports command = /usr/bin/listports
+\fR.TP
+\fBexec (S)\fR
+This is a synonym for \fIpreexec\fR.
+.TP
+\fBfake directory create times (S)\fR
+NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create
+time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the
+ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default
+reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting
+this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight
+1-1-1980 as the create time for directories.
+
+This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for
+Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated
+makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object
+file, and a make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE
+compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a
+directory. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not
+exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier
+timestamp than the object files it contains.
+
+However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time
+reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or
+or deleted in the directory. NMAKE finds all object files in
+the object directory. The timestamp of the last one built is then
+compared to the timestamp of the object directory. If the
+directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files
+will be rebuilt. Enabling this option
+ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build
+will proceed as expected.
+
+Default: \fBfake directory create times = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBfake oplocks (S)\fR
+Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission
+from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants
+an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume
+that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively
+cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache
+file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.
+
+When you set \fBfake oplocks = yes\fR, \fBsmbd(8)\fRwill
+always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using
+the file.
+
+It is generally much better to use the real \fIoplocks\fR support rather
+than this parameter.
+
+If you enable this option on all read-only shares or
+shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a
+time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see
+a big performance improvement on many operations. If you enable
+this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the
+files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use
+this option carefully!
+
+Default: \fBfake oplocks = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBfollow symlinks (S)\fR
+This parameter allows the Samba administrator
+to stop \fBsmbd(8)\fR
+from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this
+parameter to no prevents any file or directory
+that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an
+error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a
+symbolic link to \fI/etc/passwd\fR in their home
+directory for instance. However it will slow filename lookups
+down slightly.
+
+This option is enabled (i.e. \fBsmbd\fR will
+follow symbolic links) by default.
+
+Default: \fBfollow symlinks = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBforce create mode (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit
+permissions that will \fBalways\fR be set on a
+file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto
+the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its
+permissions changed. The default for this parameter is (in octal)
+000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file
+mode after the mask set in the \fIcreate mask\fR
+parameter is applied.
+
+See also the parameter \fIcreate
+mask\fR for details on masking mode bits on files.
+
+See also the \fIinherit
+permissions\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBforce create mode = 000\fR
+
+Example: \fBforce create mode = 0755\fR
+
+would force all created files to have read and execute
+permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
+read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.
+.TP
+\fBforce directory mode (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit
+permissions that will \fBalways\fR be set on a directory
+created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the
+mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this
+parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission
+bits to a created directory. This operation is done after the mode
+mask in the parameter \fIdirectory mask\fR is
+applied.
+
+See also the parameter \fI directory mask\fR for details on masking mode bits
+on created directories.
+
+See also the \fI inherit permissions\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBforce directory mode = 000\fR
+
+Example: \fBforce directory mode = 0755\fR
+
+would force all created directories to have read and execute
+permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
+read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.
+.TP
+\fBforce directory security mode (S)\fR
+This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits
+can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX
+permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.
+
+This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the
+changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that
+the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this
+mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security
+on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'.
+
+If not set explicitly this parameter is 000, which
+allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a
+directory without restrictions.
+
+\fBNote\fR that users who can access the
+Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction,
+so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.
+Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
+it set as 0000.
+
+See also the \fI directory security mask\fR, \fIsecurity mask\fR,
+\fIforce security mode
+\fRparameters.
+
+Default: \fBforce directory security mode = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBforce directory security mode = 700\fR
+.TP
+\fBforce group (S)\fR
+This specifies a UNIX group name that will be
+assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting
+to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring
+that all access to files on service will use the named group for
+their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this
+group to the files and directories within this service the Samba
+administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files.
+
+In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended
+functionality in the following way. If the group name listed here
+has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing
+the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group
+if they are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows
+an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a
+particular group will create files with group ownership set to that
+group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For
+example, the setting \fIforce group = +sys\fR means
+that only users who are already in group sys will have their default
+primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All
+other users will retain their ordinary primary group.
+
+If the \fIforce user
+\fRparameter is also set the group specified in
+\fIforce group\fR will override the primary group
+set in \fIforce user\fR.
+
+See also \fIforce
+user\fR.
+
+Default: \fBno forced group\fR
+
+Example: \fBforce group = agroup\fR
+.TP
+\fBforce security mode (S)\fR
+This parameter controls what UNIX permission
+bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating
+the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog
+box.
+
+This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the
+changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that
+the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this
+mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security
+on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.
+
+If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0,
+and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file,
+with no restrictions.
+
+\fBNote\fR that users who can access
+the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction,
+so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.
+Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
+this set to 0000.
+
+See also the \fI force directory security mode\fR,
+\fIdirectory security
+mask\fR, \fI security mask\fR parameters.
+
+Default: \fBforce security mode = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBforce security mode = 700\fR
+.TP
+\fBforce user (S)\fR
+This specifies a UNIX user name that will be
+assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service.
+This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully
+as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.
+
+This user name only gets used once a connection is established.
+Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a
+valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed
+as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected
+as. This can be very useful.
+
+In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the
+primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group
+for all file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left
+as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).
+
+See also \fIforce group
+\fR
+Default: \fBno forced user\fR
+
+Example: \fBforce user = auser\fR
+.TP
+\fBfstype (S)\fR
+This parameter allows the administrator to
+configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share
+is using that is reported by \fBsmbd(8)
+\fRwhen a client queries the filesystem type
+for a share. The default type is NTFS for
+compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other
+strings such as Samba or FAT
+if required.
+
+Default: \fBfstype = NTFS\fR
+
+Example: \fBfstype = Samba\fR
+.TP
+\fBgetwd cache (G)\fR
+This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a
+caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd()
+calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially
+when the \fIwide links\fR
+parameter is set to false.
+
+Default: \fBgetwd cache = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBgroup (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fIforce
+group\fR.
+.TP
+\fBguest account (S)\fR
+This is a username which will be used for access
+to services which are specified as \fI guest ok\fR (see below). Whatever privileges this
+user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service.
+Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not
+have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice
+for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service,
the specified username overrides this one.
-One some systems the account "nobody" may not be able to print. Use
-another account in this case. You should test this by trying to log in
-as your guest user (perhaps by using the "su -" command) and trying to
-print using lpr.
-
-Note that as of version 1.9 of Samba this option may be set
-differently for each service.
-
-.B Default:
- specified at compile time
-
-.B Example:
- guest account = nobody
-.SS getwd cache (G)
-This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a cacheing algorithm will
-be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have a
-significant impact on performance, especially when widelinks is False.
-
-.B Default:
- getwd cache = No
-
-.B Example:
- getwd cache = Yes
-.SS guest ok (S)
-See
-.B public.
-.SS guest only (S)
-If this parameter is 'yes' for a service, then only guest connections to the
-service are permitted. This parameter will have no affect if "guest ok" or
-"public" is not set for the service.
-
-See the section below on user/password validation for more information about
-this option.
-
-.B Default:
- guest only = no
-
-.B Example:
- guest only = yes
-.SS hide dot files (S)
-This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with
-a dot appear as hidden files.
-
-.B Default:
- hide dot files = yes
-
-.B Example:
- hide dot files = no
-.SS hosts allow (S)
-See
-.B allow hosts.
-.SS hosts deny (S)
-See
-.B deny hosts.
-
-.SS group (S)
-This is an alias for "force group" and is only kept for compatability
-with old versions of Samba. It may be removed in future versions.
-
-.SS hosts equiv (G)
-If this global parameter is a non-null string, it specifies the name of
-a file to read for the names of hosts and users who will be allowed access
-without specifying a password.
-
-This is not be confused with
-.B allow hosts
-which is about hosts access to services and is more useful for guest services.
-.B hosts equiv
-may be useful for NT clients which will not supply passwords to samba.
-
-NOTE: The use of hosts.equiv can be a major security hole. This is
-because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is
-very easy to get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the
-hosts.equiv option be only used if you really know what you are doing,
-or perhaps on a home network where you trust your wife and kids :-)
-
-.B Default
- No host equivalences
-
-.B Example
- hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv
-
-.SS invalid users (S)
-This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this
-service. This is really a "paranoid" check to absolutely ensure an
-improper setting does not breach your security.
-
-A name starting with @ is interpreted as a unix group.
-
-The current servicename is substituted for %S. This is useful in the
-[homes] section.
-
-See also "valid users"
-
-.B Default
- No invalid users
-
-.B Example
- invalid users = root fred admin @wheel
-
-.SS include (G)
-
-This allows you to inlcude one config file inside another. the file is
-included literally, as though typed in place.
-
-It takes the standard substitutions, except %u, %P and %S
-
-.SS keep alive (G)
-The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds
-between 'keepalive' packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets
-will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether a
-client is still present and responding.
-
-Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket being used
-has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see "socket
-options"). Basically you should only use this option if you strike
-difficulties.
-
-.B Default:
- keep alive = 0
-
-.B Example:
- keep alive = 60
-.SS load printers (G)
-A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap
-will be loaded for browsing by default.
-
-.B Default:
- load printers = no
-
-.B Example:
- load printers = yes
-
-.SS lock directory (G)
-This options specifies the directory where lock files will be placed.
-The lock files are used to implement the "max connections" option.
-
-.B Default:
- lock directory = /tmp/samba
-
-.B Example:
- lock directory = /usr/local/samba/locks
-.SS locking (S)
-This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in
-response to lock requests from the client.
-
-If "locking = no", all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and
-all lock queries will indicate that the queried lock is clear.
-
-If "locking = yes", real locking will be performed by the server.
-
-This option may be particularly useful for read-only filesystems which
-do not need locking (such as cdrom drives).
-
-Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific
-service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption.
-
-.B Default:
- locking = yes
-
-.B Example:
- locking = no
-
-.SS log file (G)
-
-This options allows you to override the name of the Samba log file
-(also known as the debug file).
-
-This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
-separate log files for each user or machine.
-
-.B Example:
- log file = /usr/local/samba/log.%m
-
-.SS log level (G)
-see "debug level"
-
-.SS lppause command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in
-order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.
+One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not
+be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test
+this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the
+\fBsu -\fR command) and trying to print using the
+system print command such as \fBlpr(1)\fR or \fB lp(1)\fR.
+
+Default: \fBspecified at compile time, usually
+"nobody"\fR
+
+Example: \fBguest account = ftp\fR
+.TP
+\fBguest ok (S)\fR
+If this parameter is yes for
+a service, then no password is required to connect to the service.
+Privileges will be those of the \fI guest account\fR.
+
+See the section below on \fI security\fR for more information about this option.
+
+Default: \fBguest ok = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBguest only (S)\fR
+If this parameter is yes for
+a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted.
+This parameter will have no effect if \fIguest ok\fR is not set for the service.
+
+See the section below on \fI security\fR for more information about this option.
+
+Default: \fBguest only = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBhide dot files (S)\fR
+This is a boolean parameter that controls whether
+files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.
+
+Default: \fBhide dot files = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBhide files(S)\fR
+This is a list of files or directories that are not
+visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied
+to any files or directories that match.
+
+Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/',
+which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*'
+and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories
+as in DOS wildcards.
+
+Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must
+not include the Unix directory separator '/'.
+
+Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable
+in hiding files.
+
+Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba,
+as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match
+as they are scanned.
+
+See also \fIhide
+dot files\fR, \fI veto files\fR and \fIcase sensitive\fR.
+
+Default: \fBno file are hidden\fR
+
+Example: \fBhide files =
+/.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/\fR
+
+The above example is based on files that the Macintosh
+SMB client (DAVE) available from
+Thursby <URL:http://www.thursby.com> creates for internal use, and also still hides
+all files beginning with a dot.
+.TP
+\fBhide local users(G)\fR
+This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX
+users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients.
+
+Default: \fBhide local users = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBhide unreadable (S)\fR
+This parameter prevents clients from seeing the
+existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.
+
+Default: \fBhide unreadable = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBhomedir map (G)\fR
+If\fInis homedir
+\fRis true, and \fBsmbd(8)\fRis also acting
+as a Win95/98 \fIlogon server\fR then this parameter
+specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's
+home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun
+auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:
+
+\fBusername server:/some/file/system\fR
+
+and the program will extract the servername from before
+the first ':'. There should probably be a better parsing system
+that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another
+automounter) maps.
+
+\fBNOTE :\fRA working NIS client is required on
+the system for this option to work.
+
+See also \fInis homedir\fR
+, \fIdomain logons\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBhomedir map = <empty string>\fR
+
+Example: \fBhomedir map = amd.homedir\fR
+.TP
+\fBhost msdfs (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter is only available
+if Samba has been configured and compiled with the \fB --with-msdfs\fR option. If set to yes,
+Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients
+to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.
+
+See also the \fI msdfs root\fR share level parameter. For
+more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba,
+refer to msdfs_setup.html.
+
+Default: \fBhost msdfs = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBhosts allow (S)\fR
+A synonym for this parameter is \fIallow
+hosts\fR.
+
+This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited
+set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.
+
+If specified in the [global] section then it will
+apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual
+service has a different setting.
+
+You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For
+example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a
+Class C subnet with something like \fBallow hosts = 150.203.5.
+\fR\&. The full syntax of the list is described in the man
+page \fIhosts_access(5)\fR. Note that this man
+page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will
+be given here also.
+
+Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always
+be allowed access unless specifically denied by a \fIhosts deny\fR option.
+
+You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and
+by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The
+\fBEXCEPT\fR keyword can also be used to limit a
+wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:
+
+Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one
+
+\fBhosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66\fR
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and
-job number to pause the print job. Currently I don't know of any print
-spooler system that can do this with a simple option, except for the PPR
-system from Trinity College (ppr\-dist.trincoll.edu/pub/ppr). One way
-of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs having a too
-low priority wont be sent to the printer. See also the lppause command.
-
-If a %p is given then the printername is put in it's place. A %j is
-replaced with the job number (an integer).
-On HPUX (see printing=hpux), if the -p%p option is added to the lpq
-command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e. if the job
-priority is lower than the set fence priority it will have the PAUSED
-status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it will have the
-SPOOLED or PRINTING status.
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lppause
-command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
-
-.B Default:
- Currently no default value is given to this string
-
-.B Example for HPUX:
- lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0
-
-.SS lpq cache time (G)
-
-This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the lpq
-command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for each
-variation of the lpq command used by the system, so if you use
-different lpq commands for different users then they won't share cache
-information.
-
-The cache files are stored in /tmp/lpq.xxxx where xxxx is a hash
-of the lpq command in use.
-
-The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a
-previous identical lpq command will be used if the cached data is less
-than 10 seconds old. A large value may be advisable if your lpq
-command is very slow.
-
-A value of 0 will disable cacheing completely.
-
-.B Default:
- lpq cache time = 10
-
-.B Example:
- lpq cache time = 30
-
-.SS lpq command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in
-order to obtain "lpq"-style printer status information.
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
-as its only parameter and outputs printer status information.
-
-Currently four styles of printer status information are supported;
-BSD, SYSV, AIX and HPUX. This covers most unix systems. You control
-which type is expected using the "printing =" option.
-
-Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly send the
-connection number for the printer they are requesting status information
-about. To get around this, the server reports on the first printer service
-connected to by the client. This only happens if the connection number sent
-is invalid.
-
-If a %p is given then the printername is put in it's place. Otherwise
-it is placed at the end of the command.
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lpq
-command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
-
-.B Default:
- depends on the setting of "printing ="
-
-.B Example:
- lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq %p
-
-.SS lpresume command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in
-order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job.
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and
-job number to resume the print job. See also the lppause command.
-
-If a %p is given then the printername is put in it's place. A %j is
-replaced with the job number (an integer).
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lpresume
-command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
-
-.B Default:
- Currently no default value is given to this string
-
-.B Example for HPUX:
- lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2
-
-.SS lprm command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in
-order to delete a print job.
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name
-and job number, and deletes the print job.
-
-Currently four styles of printer control are supported; BSD, SYSV, AIX
-and HPUX. This covers most unix systems. You control which type is
-expected using the "printing =" option.
-
-If a %p is given then the printername is put in it's place. A %j is
-replaced with the job number (an integer).
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lprm
-command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
-
-.B Default:
- depends on the setting of "printing ="
-
-.B Example 1:
- lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
-
-.B Example 2:
- lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j
-
-.SS magic output (S)
-This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output
-created by a magic script (see
-.I magic script
-below).
-
-Warning: If two clients use the same magic script in the same directory the
-output file content is undefined.
-.B Default:
- magic output = <magic script name>.out
-
-.B Example:
- magic output = myfile.txt
-.SS magic script (S)
-This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be
-executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a Unix script
-to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user.
-
-Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion, permissions
-permitting.
-
-If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file specified by
-the
-.I magic output
-parameter (see above).
-
-Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing
-carriage-return-linefeed instead of linefeed as the end-of-line
-marker. Magic scripts must be executable "as is" on the host, which
-for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.
-
-Magic scripts are EXPERIMENTAL and should NOT be relied upon.
-.B Default:
- None. Magic scripts disabled.
-
-.B Example:
- magic script = user.csh
-.SS mangled map (S)
-This is for those who want to directly map UNIX file names which are
-not representable on DOS. The mangling of names is not always what is
-needed. In particular you may have documents with file extensiosn
-that differ between dos and unix. For example, under unix it is common
-to use .html for HTML files, whereas under dos .htm is more commonly
-used.
-
-So to map 'html' to 'htm' you put:
-
- mangled map = (*.html *.htm)
+Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask
-One very useful case is to remove the annoying ;1 off the ends of
-filenames on some CDROMS (only visible under some unixes). To do this
-use a map of (*;1 *)
+\fBhosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0\fR
-.B default:
- no mangled map
+Example 3: allow a couple of hosts
-.B Example:
- mangled map = (*;1 *)
+\fBhosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur\fR
-.SS mangle case (S)
+Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but
+deny access from one particular host
-See the section on "NAME MANGLING"
+\fBhosts allow = @foonet\fR
-.SS mangled names (S)
-This controls whether non-DOS names under Unix should be mapped to
-DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS names
-should simply be ignored.
+\fBhosts deny = pirate\fR
-See the section on "NAME MANGLING" for details on how to control the
-mangling process.
+Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.
-If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:
+See \fBtestparm(1)\fR
+for a way of testing your host access to see if it does
+what you expect.
+
+Default: \fBnone (i.e., all hosts permitted access)
+\fR
+Example: \fBallow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au
+\fR.TP
+\fBhosts deny (S)\fR
+The opposite of \fIhosts allow\fR
+- hosts listed here are \fBNOT\fR permitted access to
+services unless the specific services have their own lists to override
+this one. Where the lists conflict, the \fIallow\fR
+list takes precedence.
+
+Default: \fBnone (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)
+\fR
+Example: \fBhosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au
+\fR.TP
+\fBhosts equiv (G)\fR
+If this global parameter is a non-null string,
+it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts
+and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password.
+
+This is not be confused with \fIhosts allow\fR which is about hosts
+access to services and is more useful for guest services. \fI hosts equiv\fR may be useful for NT clients which will
+not supply passwords to Samba.
+
+\fBNOTE :\fR The use of \fIhosts equiv
+\fRcan be a major security hole. This is because you are
+trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to
+get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the
+\fIhosts equiv\fR option be only used if you really
+know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust
+your spouse and kids. And only if you \fBreally\fR trust
+them :-).
+
+Default: \fBno host equivalences\fR
+
+Example: \fBhosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv\fR
+.TP
+\fBinclude (G)\fR
+This allows you to include one config file
+inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed
+in place.
+
+It takes the standard substitutions, except \fI%u
+\fR, \fI%P\fR and \fI%S\fR.
+
+Default: \fBno file included\fR
+
+Example: \fBinclude = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf
+\fR.TP
+\fBinherit permissions (S)\fR
+The permissions on new files and directories
+are normally governed by \fI create mask\fR, \fIdirectory mask\fR, \fIforce create mode\fR
+and \fIforce
+directory mode\fR but the boolean inherit
+permissions parameter overrides this.
+
+New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory,
+including bits such as setgid.
+
+New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent
+directory. Their execute bits continue to be determined by
+\fImap archive\fR
+, \fImap hidden\fR
+and \fImap system\fR
+as usual.
+
+Note that the setuid bit is \fBnever\fR set via
+inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).
+
+This can be particularly useful on large systems with
+many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes]
+share to be used flexibly by each user.
+
+See also \fIcreate mask
+\fR, \fI directory mask\fR, \fIforce create mode\fR and \fIforce directory mode\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBinherit permissions = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBinterfaces (G)\fR
+This option allows you to override the default
+network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name
+registration and other NBT traffic. By default Samba will query
+the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any
+interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.
+
+The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string
+can be in any of the following forms:
.RS
-- the first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of
-the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up
-to) five characters of the mangled name.
-
-- a tilde ("~") is appended to the first part of the mangled name, followed
-by a two-character unique sequence, based on the origonal root name
-(i.e., the original filename minus its final extension). The final
-extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper
-case characters or is longer than three characters.
-
-Note that the character to use may be specified using the "mangling
-char" option, if you don't like ~.
-
-- the first three alphanumeric characters of the final extension are preserved,
-forced to upper case and appear as the extension of the mangled name. The
-final extension is defined as that part of the original filename after the
-rightmost dot. If there are no dots in the filename, the mangled name will
-have no extension (except in the case of hidden files - see below).
-
-- files whose Unix name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden
-files. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the
-leading dot removed and "___" as its extension regardless of actual original
-extension (that's three underscores).
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+a network interface name (such as eth0).
+This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match
+any interface starting with the substring "eth"
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+an IP address. In this case the netmask is
+determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the
+kernel
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+an IP/mask pair.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+a broadcast/mask pair.
.RE
+.PP
+The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such
+as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted
+decimal form.
+.PP
+.PP
+The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted
+decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via
+the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms.
+.PP
+.PP
+For example, the following line:
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBinterfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+would configure three network interfaces corresponding
+to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10.
+The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also \fIbind
+interfaces only\fR.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBall active interfaces except 127.0.0.1
+that are broadcast capable\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBinvalid users (S)\fR
+This is a list of users that should not be allowed
+to login to this service. This is really a \fBparanoid\fR
+check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach
+your security.
+
+A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS
+netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX
+group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database.
+
+A name starting with '+' is interpreted only
+by looking in the UNIX group database. A name starting with
+\&'&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database
+(this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters
+\&'+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order
+so the value \fI+&group\fR means check the
+UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and
+the value \fI&+group\fR means check the NIS
+netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the
+same as the '@' prefix).
+
+The current servicename is substituted for \fI%S\fR.
+This is useful in the [homes] section.
+
+See also \fIvalid users
+\fR\&.
+
+Default: \fBno invalid users\fR
+
+Example: \fBinvalid users = root fred admin @wheel
+\fR.TP
+\fBkeepalive (G)\fR
+The value of the parameter (an integer) represents
+the number of seconds between \fIkeepalive\fR
+packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be
+sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether
+a client is still present and responding.
+
+Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket
+being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see \fIsocket options\fR).
+Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.
+
+Default: \fBkeepalive = 300\fR
+
+Example: \fBkeepalive = 600\fR
+.TP
+\fBkernel oplocks (G)\fR
+For UNIXes that support kernel based \fIoplocks\fR
+(currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter
+allows the use of them to be turned on or off.
+
+Kernel oplocks support allows Samba \fIoplocks
+\fRto be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation
+accesses a file that \fBsmbd(8)\fR
+has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between
+SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a \fBvery\fR
+cool feature :-).
+
+This parameter defaults to on, but is translated
+to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support.
+You should never need to touch this parameter.
+
+See also the \fIoplocks\fR
+and \fIlevel2 oplocks
+\fRparameters.
+
+Default: \fBkernel oplocks = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlanman auth (G)\fR
+This parameter determines whether or not smbdwill
+attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash.
+If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows
+NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS
+network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.
+
+Default : \fBlanman auth = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlarge readwrite (G)\fR
+This parameter determines whether or not smbd
+supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced
+with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs
+this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such
+as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve performance by 10% with
+Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not as tested as some other Samba
+code paths.
+
+Default : \fBlarge readwrite = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBldap admin dn (G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has been
+configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option
+at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
+under active development.
+
+The \fIldap admin dn\fR defines the Distinguished
+Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap
+server when retreiving user account information. The \fIldap
+admin dn\fR is used in conjunction with the admin dn password
+stored in the \fIprivate/secrets.tdb\fR file. See the
+\fBsmbpasswd(8)\fRman
+page for more information on how to accmplish this.
+
+Default : \fBnone\fR
+.TP
+\fBldap filter (G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has been
+configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option
+at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
+under active development.
+
+This parameter specifies the RFC 2254 compliant LDAP search filter.
+The default is to match the login name with the uid
+attribute for all entries matching the sambaAccount
+objectclass. Note that this filter should only return one entry.
+
+Default : \fBldap filter = (&(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))\fR
+.TP
+\fBldap port (G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has been
+configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option
+at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
+under active development.
+
+This option is used to control the tcp port number used to contact
+the \fIldap server\fR.
+The default is to use the stand LDAPS port 636.
+
+See Also: ldap ssl
+
+Default : \fBldap port = 636\fR
+.TP
+\fBldap server (G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has been
+configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option
+at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
+under active development.
+
+This parameter should contains the FQDN of the ldap directory
+server which should be queried to locate user account information.
+
+Default : \fBldap server = localhost\fR
+.TP
+\fBldap ssl (G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has been
+configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option
+at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
+under active development.
+
+This option is used to define whether or not Samba should
+use SSL when connecting to the \fIldap
+server\fR. This is \fBNOT\fR related to
+Samba SSL support which is enabled by specifying the
+\fB--with-ssl\fR option to the \fIconfigure\fR
+script (see \fIssl\fR).
+
+The \fIldap ssl\fR can be set to one of three values:
+(a) on - Always use SSL when contacting the
+\fIldap server\fR, (b) off -
+Never use SSL when querying the directory, or (c) start_tls
+- Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation
+(RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.
+
+Default : \fBldap ssl = on\fR
+.TP
+\fBldap suffix (G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has been
+configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option
+at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
+under active development.
+
+Default : \fBnone\fR
+.TP
+\fBlevel2 oplocks (S)\fR
+This parameter controls whether Samba supports
+level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.
+
+Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients
+that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock
+to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead
+of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional,
+exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that
+support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie.
+they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance
+for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as
+application .EXE files).
+
+Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock
+writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed
+or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and
+delete any read-ahead caches.
+
+It is recommended that this parameter be turned on
+to speed access to shared executables.
+
+For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.
+
+Currently, if \fIkernel
+oplocks\fR are supported then level2 oplocks are
+not granted (even if this parameter is set to yes).
+Note also, the \fIoplocks\fR
+parameter must be set to true on this share in order for
+this parameter to have any effect.
+
+See also the \fIoplocks\fR
+and \fIkernel oplocks\fR
+parameters.
+
+Default: \fBlevel2 oplocks = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlm announce (G)\fR
+This parameter determines if \fBnmbd(8)\fRwill produce Lanman announce
+broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see
+the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three
+values, true, false, or
+auto. The default is auto.
+If set to false Samba will never produce these
+broadcasts. If set to true Samba will produce
+Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter
+\fIlm interval\fR. If set to auto
+Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will
+listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will
+then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter
+\fIlm interval\fR.
+
+See also \fIlm interval
+\fR\&.
+
+Default: \fBlm announce = auto\fR
+
+Example: \fBlm announce = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlm interval (G)\fR
+If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce
+broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the \fIlm announce\fR parameter) then this
+parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be
+made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be
+made despite the setting of the \fIlm announce\fR
+parameter.
+
+See also \fIlm
+announce\fR.
+
+Default: \fBlm interval = 60\fR
+
+Example: \fBlm interval = 120\fR
+.TP
+\fBload printers (G)\fR
+A boolean variable that controls whether all
+printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default.
+See the printers section for
+more details.
+
+Default: \fBload printers = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlocal master (G)\fR
+This option allows \fB nmbd(8)\fRto try and become a local master browser
+on a subnet. If set to false then \fB nmbd\fR will not attempt to become a local master browser
+on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By
+default this value is set to true. Setting this value to true doesn't
+mean that Samba will \fBbecome\fR the local master
+browser on a subnet, just that \fBnmbd\fR will \fB participate\fR in elections for local master browser.
+
+Setting this value to false will cause \fBnmbd\fR
+\fBnever\fR to become a local master browser.
+
+Default: \fBlocal master = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlock dir (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fI lock directory\fR.
+.TP
+\fBlock directory (G)\fR
+This option specifies the directory where lock
+files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the
+\fImax connections\fR
+option.
+
+Default: \fBlock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks\fR
+
+Example: \fBlock directory = /var/run/samba/locks\fR
+.TP
+\fBlocking (S)\fR
+This controls whether or not locking will be
+performed by the server in response to lock requests from the
+client.
+
+If \fBlocking = no\fR, all lock and unlock
+requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report
+that the file in question is available for locking.
+
+If \fBlocking = yes\fR, real locking will be performed
+by the server.
+
+This option \fBmay\fR be useful for read-only
+filesystems which \fBmay\fR not need locking (such as
+CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of no
+is not really recommended even in this case.
+
+Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a
+specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption.
+You should never need to set this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBlocking = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBlog file (G)\fR
+This option allows you to override the name
+of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).
+
+This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
+you to have separate log files for each user or machine.
+
+Example: \fBlog file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m
+\fR.TP
+\fBlog level (G)\fR
+The value of the parameter (an integer) allows
+the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the
+\fIsmb.conf\fR file. This is to give greater
+flexibility in the configuration of the system.
+
+The default will be the log level specified on
+the command line or level zero if none was specified.
+
+Example: \fBlog level = 3\fR
+.TP
+\fBlogon drive (G)\fR
+This parameter specifies the local path to
+which the home directory will be connected (see \fIlogon home\fR)
+and is only used by NT Workstations.
+
+Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
+logon server.
+
+Default: \fBlogon drive = z:\fR
+
+Example: \fBlogon drive = h:\fR
+.TP
+\fBlogon home (G)\fR
+This parameter specifies the home directory
+location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC.
+It allows you to do
+
+C:\\> \fBNET USE H: /HOME\fR
+
+from a command prompt, for example.
+
+This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
+you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
+
+This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure
+that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's
+home directory. This is done in the following way:
+
+\fBlogon home = \\\\%N\\%U\\profile\fR
+
+This tells Samba to return the above string, with
+substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally
+in a NetUserGetInfo request. Win9X clients truncate the info to
+\\\\server\\share when a user does \fBnet use /home\fR
+but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.
+
+Note that in prior versions of Samba, the \fIlogon path\fR was returned rather than
+\fIlogon home\fR. This broke \fBnet use
+/home\fR but allowed profiles outside the home directory.
+The current implementation is correct, and can be used for
+profiles if you use the above trick.
+
+This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon
+server.
-The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric characters.
-
-This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory share
-the same first five alphanumeric characters. The probability of such a clash
-is 1/1300.
-
-The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between Unix
-directories from DOS while retaining the long Unix filename. Unix files can
-be renamed to a new extension from DOS and will retain the same basename.
-Mangled names do not change between sessions.
-
-.B Default:
- mangled names = yes
-
-.B Example:
- mangled names = no
-.SS mangling char (S)
-This controls what character is used as the "magic" character in name
-mangling. The default is a ~ but this may interfere with some
-software. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer.
+Default: \fBlogon home = "\\\\%N\\%U"\fR
+
+Example: \fBlogon home = "\\\\remote_smb_server\\%U"\fR
+.TP
+\fBlogon path (G)\fR
+This parameter specifies the home directory
+where roaming profiles (NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are
+stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has
+nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to
+handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the \fIlogon home\fR parameter.
+
+This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you
+to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also
+specifies the directory from which the "Application Data",
+(\fIdesktop\fR, \fIstart menu\fR,
+\fInetwork neighborhood\fR, \fIprograms\fR
+and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on
+your Windows NT client.
+
+The share and the path must be readable by the user for
+the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT
+client. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first
+time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat
+and other directories.
+
+Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can,
+if required, be made read-only. It is not advisable that the
+NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to
+achieve the desired effect (a \fBMAN\fRdatory
+profile).
+
+Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to
+the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in.
+Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a
+reference to the homes share (i.e. setting this parameter to
+\\%N\\%U\\profile_path will cause problems).
+
+This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
+you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
+
+Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up
+as a logon server.
+
+Default: \fBlogon path = \\\\%N\\%U\\profile\fR
+
+Example: \fBlogon path = \\\\PROFILESERVER\\PROFILE\\%U\fR
+.TP
+\fBlogon script (G)\fR
+This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or
+NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when
+a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS
+style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the
+file is recommended.
+
+The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon]
+service. If the [netlogon] service specifies a \fIpath\fR of \fI/usr/local/samba/netlogon
+\fR, and \fBlogon script = STARTUP.BAT\fR, then
+the file that will be downloaded is:
+
+\fI/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT\fR
+
+The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice. A
+suggested command would be to add \fBNET TIME \\\\SERVER /SET
+/YES\fR, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with
+the same time server. Another use would be to add \fBNET USE
+U: \\\\SERVER\\UTILS\fR for commonly used utilities, or \fB NET USE Q: \\\\SERVER\\ISO9001_QA\fR for example.
+
+Note that it is particularly important not to allow write
+access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission
+on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow
+the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be
+breached.
+
+This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you
+to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
+
+This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon
+server.
-.B Default:
- mangling char = ~
+Default: \fBno logon script defined\fR
+
+Example: \fBlogon script = scripts\\%U.bat\fR
+.TP
+\fBlppause command (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the command to be
+executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling
+a specific print job.
+
+This command should be a program or script which takes
+a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way
+of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs
+having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer.
+
+If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name
+is put in its place. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with
+the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see \fIprinting=hpux
+\fR), if the \fI-p%p\fR option is added
+to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e.
+if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will
+have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it
+will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.
+
+Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path
+in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
+
+See also the \fIprinting
+\fRparameter.
+
+Default: Currently no default value is given to
+this string, unless the value of the \fIprinting\fR
+parameter is SYSV, in which case the default is :
+
+\fBlp -i %p-%j -H hold\fR
+
+or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter
+is SOFTQ, then the default is:
+
+\fBqstat -s -j%j -h\fR
+
+Example for HPUX: \fBlppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt
+%p-%j -p0\fR
+.TP
+\fBlpq cache time (G)\fR
+This controls how long lpq info will be cached
+for to prevent the \fBlpq\fR command being called too
+often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the \fB lpq\fR command used by the system, so if you use different
+\fBlpq\fR commands for different users then they won't
+share cache information.
+
+The cache files are stored in \fI/tmp/lpq.xxxx\fR
+where xxxx is a hash of the \fBlpq\fR command in use.
+
+The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results
+of a previous identical \fBlpq\fR command will be used
+if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old. A large value may
+be advisable if your \fBlpq\fR command is very slow.
+
+A value of 0 will disable caching completely.
+
+See also the \fIprinting
+\fRparameter.
+
+Default: \fBlpq cache time = 10\fR
+
+Example: \fBlpq cache time = 30\fR
+.TP
+\fBlpq command (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the command to be
+executed on the server host in order to obtain \fBlpq
+\fR-style printer status information.
+
+This command should be a program or script which
+takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer
+status information.
+
+Currently eight styles of printer status information
+are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX and SOFTQ.
+This covers most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected
+using the \fIprinting =\fR option.
+
+Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not
+correctly send the connection number for the printer they are
+requesting status information about. To get around this, the
+server reports on the first printer service connected to by the
+client. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid.
+
+If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name
+is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the
+command.
-.B Example:
- mangling char = ^
+Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path
+in the \fIlpq command\fR as the \fB$PATH
+\fRmay not be available to the server.
+
+See also the \fIprinting
+\fRparameter.
+
+Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fI printing\fB\fR
+
+Example: \fBlpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p\fR
+.TP
+\fBlpresume command (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the command to be
+executed on the server host in order to restart or continue
+printing or spooling a specific print job.
+
+This command should be a program or script which takes
+a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See
+also the \fIlppause command
+\fRparameter.
+
+If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name
+is put in its place. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with
+the job number (an integer).
+
+Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path
+in the \fIlpresume command\fR as the PATH may not
+be available to the server.
+
+See also the \fIprinting
+\fRparameter.
+
+Default: Currently no default value is given
+to this string, unless the value of the \fIprinting\fR
+parameter is SYSV, in which case the default is :
+
+\fBlp -i %p-%j -H resume\fR
+
+or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter
+is SOFTQ, then the default is:
+
+\fBqstat -s -j%j -r\fR
+
+Example for HPUX: \fBlpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt
+%p-%j -p2\fR
+.TP
+\fBlprm command (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the command to be
+executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.
+
+This command should be a program or script which takes
+a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.
+
+If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name
+is put in its place. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with
+the job number (an integer).
+
+Note that it is good practice to include the absolute
+path in the \fIlprm command\fR as the PATH may not be
+available to the server.
+
+See also the \fIprinting
+\fRparameter.
+
+Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting
+\fB\fR
+Example 1: \fBlprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
+\fR
+Example 2: \fBlprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j
+\fR.TP
+\fBmachine password timeout (G)\fR
+If a Samba server is a member of a Windows
+NT Domain (see the security = domain)
+parameter) then periodically a running smbd(8)process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT
+PASSWORD stored in the TDB called \fIprivate/secrets.tdb
+\fR\&. This parameter specifies how often this password
+will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in
+seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.
+
+See also \fBsmbpasswd(8)
+\fR, and the security = domain) parameter.
+
+Default: \fBmachine password timeout = 604800\fR
+.TP
+\fBmagic output (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the name of a file
+which will contain output created by a magic script (see the
+\fImagic script\fR
+parameter below).
+
+Warning: If two clients use the same \fImagic script
+\fRin the same directory the output file content
+is undefined.
+
+Default: \fBmagic output = <magic script name>.out
+\fR
+Example: \fBmagic output = myfile.txt\fR
+.TP
+\fBmagic script (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the name of a file which,
+if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed.
+This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and
+executed on behalf of the connected user.
+
+Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon
+completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level
+of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.
+
+If the script generates output, output will be sent to
+the file specified by the \fI magic output\fR parameter (see above).
+
+Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts
+containing CR/LF instead of CR as
+the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable
+\fBas is\fR on the host, which for some hosts and
+some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.
+
+Magic scripts are \fBEXPERIMENTAL\fR and
+should \fBNOT\fR be relied upon.
+
+Default: \fBNone. Magic scripts disabled.\fR
+
+Example: \fBmagic script = user.csh\fR
+.TP
+\fBmangle case (S)\fR
+See the section on NAME MANGLING
+
+Default: \fBmangle case = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBmangled map (S)\fR
+This is for those who want to directly map UNIX
+file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling
+of names is not always what is needed. In particular you may have
+documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX.
+For example, under UNIX it is common to use \fI.html\fR
+for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS \fI.htm\fR
+is more commonly used.
+
+So to map \fIhtml\fR to \fIhtm\fR
+you would use:
+
+\fBmangled map = (*.html *.htm)\fR
+
+One very useful case is to remove the annoying \fI;1
+\fRoff the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible
+under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).
+
+Default: \fBno mangled map\fR
+
+Example: \fBmangled map = (*;1 *;)\fR
+.TP
+\fBmangled names (S)\fR
+This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX
+should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible,
+or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.
+
+See the section on NAME MANGLING for details on how to control the mangling process.
-.SS max log size (G)
+If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters
+before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced
+to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters
+of the mangled name.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled
+name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the
+original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final
+extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation
+only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three
+characters.
-This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log
-file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is
-exceeded it will rename the file, adding a .old extension.
+Note that the character to use may be specified using
+the \fImangling char\fR
+option, if you don't like '~'.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The first three alphanumeric characters of the final
+extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the
+extension of the mangled name. The final extension is defined as that
+part of the original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no
+dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except
+in the case of "hidden files" - see below).
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be
+presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as
+for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as
+its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three
+underscores).
+.RE
+.PP
+The two-digit hash value consists of upper case
+alphanumeric characters.
+.PP
+.PP
+This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files
+in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters.
+The probability of such a clash is 1/1300.
+.PP
+.PP
+The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be
+copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining
+the long UNIX filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension
+from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names
+do not change between sessions.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBmangled names = yes\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBmangled stack (G)\fR
+This parameter controls the number of mangled names
+that should be cached in the Samba server smbd(8).
+
+This stack is a list of recently mangled base names
+(extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters
+or contains upper case characters).
+
+The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled
+names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names.
+However, large stack sizes will slow most directory accesses. Smaller
+stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes).
+
+It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long
+filenames, so be prepared for some surprises!
+
+Default: \fBmangled stack = 50\fR
+
+Example: \fBmangled stack = 100\fR
+.TP
+\fBmangling char (S)\fR
+This controls what character is used as
+the \fBmagic\fR character in name mangling. The default is a '~'
+but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set
+it to whatever you prefer.
+
+Default: \fBmangling char = ~\fR
+
+Example: \fBmangling char = ^\fR
+.TP
+\fBmap archive (S)\fR
+This controls whether the DOS archive attribute
+should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit
+is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One
+motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making
+any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX. This can
+be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...
+
+Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR
+parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out
+(i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details.
+
+Default: \fBmap archive = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBmap hidden (S)\fR
+This controls whether DOS style hidden files
+should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.
+
+Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR
+to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e.
+it must include 001). See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details.
+
+Default: \fBmap hidden = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBmap system (S)\fR
+This controls whether DOS style system files
+should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.
+
+Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR
+to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e.
+it must include 010). See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details.
+
+Default: \fBmap system = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBmap to guest (G)\fR
+This parameter is only useful in security modes other than \fIsecurity = share\fR
+- i.e. user, server,
+and domain.
+
+This parameter can take three different values, which tell
+smbd(8)what to do with user
+login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.
+
+The three settings are :
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+Never - Means user login
+requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the
+default.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+Bad User - Means user
+logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username
+does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and
+mapped into the \fI guest account\fR.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+Bad Password - Means user logins
+with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped
+into the guest account. Note that
+this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing
+their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and
+will not know the reason they cannot access files they think
+they should - there will have been no message given to them
+that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will
+\fBhate\fR you if you set the \fImap to
+guest\fR parameter this way :-).
+.RE
+.PP
+Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest"
+share services when using \fIsecurity\fR modes other than
+share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being
+requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after
+the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server
+cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection
+to the share) for "Guest" shares.
+.PP
+.PP
+For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this
+parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the GUEST_SESSSETUP value in local.h.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBmap to guest = Never\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBmap to guest = Bad User\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBmax connections (S)\fR
+This option allows the number of simultaneous
+connections to a service to be limited. If \fImax connections
+\fRis greater than 0 then connections will be refused if
+this number of connections to the service are already open. A value
+of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.
+
+Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The
+lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the \fIlock directory\fR
+option.
+
+Default: \fBmax connections = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBmax connections = 10\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax disk size (G)\fR
+This option allows you to put an upper limit
+on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100
+then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in
+size.
+
+Note that this option does not limit the amount of
+data you can put on the disk. In the above case you could still
+store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks
+for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the
+result will be bounded by the amount specified in \fImax
+disk size\fR.
+
+This option is primarily useful to work around bugs
+in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks,
+particularly disks over 1GB in size.
+
+A \fImax disk size\fR of 0 means no limit.
+
+Default: \fBmax disk size = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBmax disk size = 1000\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax log size (G)\fR
+This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies
+the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks
+the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding
+a \fI.old\fR extension.
A size of 0 means no limit.
-.B Default:
- max log size = 5000
-
-.B Example:
- max log size = 1000
-
-.SS max xmit (G)
-
-This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated
-by Samba. The default is 65535, which is the maximum. In some cases
-you may find you get better performance with a smaller value. A value
-below 2048 is likely to cause problems.
-
-.B Default:
- max xmit = 65535
-
-.B Example:
- max xmit = 8192
-
-.SS mangled stack (G)
-This parameter controls the number of mangled names that should be cached in
-the Samba server.
-
-This stack is a list of recently mangled base names (extensions are only
-maintained if they are longer than 3 characters or contains upper case
-characters).
-
-The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled names can be
-successfully converted to correct long Unix names. However, large stack
-sizes will slow most directory access. Smaller stacks save memory in the
-server (each stack element costs 256 bytes).
-
-It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long file names, so
-be prepared for some surprises!
-
-.B Default:
- mangled stack = 50
-
-.B Example:
- mangled stack = 100
-
-.SS map archive (S)
-This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to Unix
-execute bits. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified
-since its last backup. One motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your
-PC from making any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX.
-This can be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...
-
-.B Default:
- map archive = yes
-
-.B Example:
- map archive = no
-
-.SS map hidden (S)
-This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to Unix
-execute bits.
-
-.B Default:
- map hidden = no
-
-.B Example:
- map hidden = yes
-.SS map system (S)
-This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to Unix
-execute bits.
-
-.B Default:
- map system = no
-
-.B Example:
- map system = yes
-.SS max connections (S)
-This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a
-service to be limited. If "max connections" is greater than 0 then
-connections will be refused if this number of connections to the
-service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of
-connections may be made.
-
-Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files
-will be stored in the directory specified by the "lock directory" option.
-
-.B Default:
- max connections = 0
-
-.B Example:
- max connections = 10
-.SS only user (S)
-This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with
-usernames not in the user= list will be allowed. By default this
-option is disabled so a client can supply a username to be used by
-the server.
-
-Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the
-service name. This can be annoying for the [homes] section. To get
-around this you could use "user = %S" which means your "user" list
-will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name
-of the user.
-
-.B Default:
- only user = False
-
-.B Example:
- only user = True
-
-.SS message command (G)
-
-This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup
-style message.
-
-This would normally be a command that would deliver the message
-somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination.
-
-What I use is:
-
- message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &
-
-This delivers the message using xedit, then removes it
-afterwards. NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN
-IMMEDIATELY. That's why I have the & on the end. If it doesn't return
-immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they
-should recover after 30secs, hopefully).
-
-All messages are delivered as the global guest user. The command takes
-the standard substitutions, although %u won't work (%U may be better
+Default: \fBmax log size = 5000\fR
+
+Example: \fBmax log size = 1000\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax mux (G)\fR
+This option controls the maximum number of
+outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client
+it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBmax mux = 50\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax open files (G)\fR
+This parameter limits the maximum number of
+open files that one smbd(8)file
+serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The
+default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses
+only one bit per unopened file.
+
+The limit of the number of open files is usually set
+by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than
+this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBmax open files = 10000\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax print jobs (S)\fR
+This parameter limits the maximum number of
+jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment.
+If this number is exceeded, \fB smbd(8)\fRwill remote "Out of Space" to the client.
+See all \fItotal
+print jobs\fR.
+
+Default: \fBmax print jobs = 1000\fR
+
+Example: \fBmax print jobs = 5000\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax protocol (G)\fR
+The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest
+protocol level that will be supported by the server.
+
+Possible values are :
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+CORE: Earliest version. No
+concept of user names.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+COREPLUS: Slight improvements on
+CORE for efficiency.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+LANMAN1: First \fB modern\fR version of the protocol. Long filename
+support.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+LANMAN2: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+NT1: Current up to date version of
+the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.
+.RE
+.PP
+Normally this option should not be set as the automatic
+negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing
+the appropriate protocol.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also \fImin
+protocol\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBmax protocol = NT1\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBmax protocol = LANMAN1\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBmax smbd processes (G)\fR
+This parameter limits the maximum number of
+\fBsmbd(8)\fR
+processes concurrently running on a system and is intended
+as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event
+that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this
+number of connections. Remember that under normal operating
+conditions, each user will have an smbdassociated with him or her
+to handle connections to all shares from a given host.
+
+Default: \fBmax smbd processes = 0\fR ## no limit
+
+Example: \fBmax smbd processes = 1000\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax ttl (G)\fR
+This option tells nmbd(8)
+what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds)
+when \fBnmbd\fR is requesting a name using either a
+broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to
+change this parameter. The default is 3 days.
+
+Default: \fBmax ttl = 259200\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax wins ttl (G)\fR
+This option tells nmbd(8)
+when acting as a WINS server ( \fIwins support = yes\fR) what the maximum
+\&'time to live' of NetBIOS names that \fBnmbd\fR
+will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this
+parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).
+
+See also the \fImin
+wins ttl\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBmax wins ttl = 518400\fR
+.TP
+\fBmax xmit (G)\fR
+This option controls the maximum packet size
+that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 65535, which
+is the maximum. In some cases you may find you get better performance
+with a smaller value. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems.
+
+Default: \fBmax xmit = 65535\fR
+
+Example: \fBmax xmit = 8192\fR
+.TP
+\fBmessage command (G)\fR
+This specifies what command to run when the
+server receives a WinPopup style message.
+
+This would normally be a command that would
+deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is
+up to your imagination.
+
+An example is:
+
+\fBmessage command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &\fR
+
+This delivers the message using \fBxedit\fR, then
+removes it afterwards. \fBNOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT
+THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY\fR. That's why I
+have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then
+your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover
+after 30 seconds, hopefully).
+
+All messages are delivered as the global guest user.
+The command takes the standard substitutions, although \fI %u\fR won't work (\fI%U\fR may be better
in this case).
-Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply. In
-particular:
-
-%s = the filename containing the message
-
-%t = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the server
-name)
-
-%f = who the message is from
-
-You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your
-fancy. Please let me know of any really interesting ideas you have.
-
+Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional
+ones apply. In particular:
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fI%s\fR = the filename containing
+the message.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fI%t\fR = the destination that
+the message was sent to (probably the server name).
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fI%f\fR = who the message
+is from.
+.RE
+.PP
+You could make this command send mail, or whatever else
+takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting
+ideas you have.
+.PP
+.PP
Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:
-
-message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on %m' root < %s; rm %s
-
-If you don't have a message command then the message won't be
-delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was an
-error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code and carries
-on regardless, saying that the message was delivered.
-
-If you want to silently delete it then try "message command = rm %s".
-
-For the really adventurous, try something like this:
-
-message command = csh -c 'csh < %s |& /usr/local/samba/smbclient \\
- -M %m; rm %s' &
-
-this would execute the command as a script on the server, then give
-them the result in a WinPopup message. Note that this could cause a
-loop if you send a message from the server using smbclient! You better
-wrap the above in a script that checks for this :-)
-
-.B Default:
- no message command
-
-.B Example:
- message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &
-
-.SS min print space (S)
-
-This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available
-before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in
-kilobytes. The default is 0, which means no limit.
-
-.B Default:
- min print space = 0
-
-.B Example:
- min print space = 2000
-
-.SS null passwords (G)
-Allow or disallow access to accounts that have null passwords.
-
-.B Default:
- null passwords = no
-
-.B Example:
- null passwords = yes
-
-.SS os level (G)
-This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for
-browse elections. See BROWSING.txt for details.
-
-.SS packet size (G)
-The maximum transmit packet size during a raw read. This option is no
-longer implemented as of version 1.7.00, and is kept only so old
-configuration files do not become invalid.
-
-.SS passwd chat (G)
-This string coontrols the "chat" conversation that takes places
-between smbd and the local password changing program to change the
-users password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive
-pairs that smbd uses to determine what to send to the passwd program
-and what to expect back. If the expected output is not received then
-the password is not changed.
-
-This chat sequence is often quite site specific, deppending on what
-local methods are used for password control (such as NIS+ etc).
-
-The string can contain the macros %o and %n which are substituted for
-the old and new passwords respectively. It can aso contain the
-standard macros \\n \\r \\t and \\s to give line-feed, carriage-return,
-tab and space.
-
-The string can also contain a * which matches any sequence of
-characters.
-
-Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into
-a single string.
-
-If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a fullstop "."
-then no string is sent. Similarly, is the expect string is a fullstop
-then no string is expected.
-
-.B Example:
- passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n \\
- "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Password changed*"
-
-.B Default:
- passwd chat = *old*password* %o\\n *new*password* %n\\n *new*password* %n\\n *changed*
-
-.SS passwd program (G)
-The name of a program that can be used to set user passwords.
-
-This is only necessary if you have enabled remote password changing at
-compile time. Any occurances of %u will be replaced with the user
-name.
-
-Also note that many passwd programs insist in "reasonable" passwords,
-such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case chars and
-digits. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as Windows for
-Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it.
-
-.B Default:
- passwd program = /bin/passwd
-
-.B Example:
- passwd program = /sbin/passwd %u
-
-.SS password level (G)
-Some client/server conbinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords.
-One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces
-passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone
-when using COREPLUS!
-
-This parameter defines the maximum number of characters that may be upper case
-in passwords.
-
-For example, say the password given was "FRED". If
-.B password level
-is set to 1 (one), the following combinations would be tried if "FRED" failed:
-"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd", "freD". If
-.B password level was set to 2 (two), the following combinations would also be
-tried: "FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED". And so on.
-
-The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely it is that a mixed
-case password will be matched against a single case password. However, you
-should be aware that use of this parameter reduces security and increases the
-time taken to process a new connection.
-
-A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password as is
-and the password in all-lower case.
-
-If you find the connections are taking too long with this option then
-you probably have a slow crypt() routine. Samba now comes with a fast
-"ufc crypt" that you can select in the Makefile. You should also make
-sure the PASSWORD_LENGTH option is correct for your system in local.h
-and includes.h. On most systems only the first 8 chars of a password
-are significant so PASSWORD_LENGTH should be 8, but on some longer
-passwords are significant. The inlcudes.h file tries to select the
-right length for your system.
-
-.B Default:
- password level = 0
-
-.B Example:
- password level = 4
-
-.SS password server (G)
-
-By specifying the name of another SMB server (such as a WinNT box)
-with this option, and using "security = server" you can get Samba to
-do all it's username/password validation via a remote server.
-
-This options sets the name of the password server to use. It must be a
-netbios name, so if the machines netbios name is different from it's
-internet name then you may have to add it's netbios name to
-/etc/hosts.
-
-The password server much be a machine capable of using the "LM1.2X002"
-or the "LM NT 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security
-mode.
-
-NOTE: Using a password server means your unix box (running Samba) is
-only as secure as your password server. DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD
-SERVER THAT YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST.
-
-Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving. This will
-cause a loop and could lock up your Samba server!
-
-The name of the password server takes the standard substitutions, but
-probably the only useful one is %m, which means the Samba server will
-use the incoming client as the password server. If you use this then
-you better trust your clients, and you better restrict them with hosts
-allow!
-
-If you list several hosts in the "password server" option then smbd
-will try each in turn till it finds one that responds. This is useful
-in case your primary server goes down.
-
-.SS path (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'directory'.
-
-This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to
-be given access. In the case of printable services, this is where print data
-will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing.
-
-For a printable service offering guest access, the service should be readonly
-and the path should be world-writable and have the sticky bit set. This is not
-mandatory of course, but you probably won't get the results you expect if you
-do otherwise.
-
-Any occurances of %u in the path will be replaced with the username
-that the client is connecting as. Any occurances of %m will be
-replaced by the name of the machine they are connecting from. These
-replacements are very useful for setting up pseudo home directories
-for users.
-
-Note that this path will be based on 'root dir' if one was specified.
-.B Default:
- none
-
-.B Example:
- path = /home/fred+
-
-.SS postexec (S)
-
-This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is
-disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run
-as the root on some systems.
-
-An interesting example may be do unmount server resources:
-
-postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom
-
-See also preexec
-
-.B Default:
- none (no command executed)
-
-.B Example:
- postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log
-
-.SS postscript (S)
-This parameter forces a printer to interpret the print files as
-postscript. This is done by adding a %! to the start of print output.
-
-This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist in putting
-a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then confuses your
-printer.
-
-.B Default:
- postscript = False
-
-.B Example:
- postscript = True
-
-.SS preexec (S)
-
-This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is
-connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.
-
-An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every
-time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:
-
-preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | \
- /usr/local/samba/smbclient -M %m -I %I' &
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBmessage command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on
+%m' root < %s; rm %s\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+If you don't have a message command then the message
+won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was
+an error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code
+and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered.
+.PP
+.PP
+If you want to silently delete it then try:
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBmessage command = rm %s\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBno message command\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBmessage command = csh -c 'xedit %s;
+rm %s' &\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBmin passwd length (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fImin password length\fR.
+.TP
+\fBmin password length (G)\fR
+This option sets the minimum length in characters
+of a plaintext password that \fBsmbd\fR will accept when performing
+UNIX password changing.
+
+See also \fIunix
+password sync\fR, \fIpasswd program\fR and \fIpasswd chat debug\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBmin password length = 5\fR
+.TP
+\fBmin print space (S)\fR
+This sets the minimum amount of free disk
+space that must be available before a user will be able to spool
+a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which
+means a user can always spool a print job.
+
+See also the \fIprinting
+\fRparameter.
+
+Default: \fBmin print space = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBmin print space = 2000\fR
+.TP
+\fBmin protocol (G)\fR
+The value of the parameter (a string) is the
+lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer
+to the \fImax protocol\fR
+parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description
+of each. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in
+\fIsource/smbd/negprot.c\fR for a listing of known protocol
+dialects supported by clients.
+
+If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should
+also refer to the \fIlanman
+auth\fR parameter. Otherwise, you should never need
+to change this parameter.
+
+Default : \fBmin protocol = CORE\fR
+
+Example : \fBmin protocol = NT1\fR # disable DOS
+clients
+.TP
+\fBmin wins ttl (G)\fR
+This option tells nmbd(8)
+when acting as a WINS server (\fI wins support = yes\fR) what the minimum 'time to live'
+of NetBIOS names that \fBnmbd\fR will grant will be (in
+seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default
+is 6 hours (21600 seconds).
+
+Default: \fBmin wins ttl = 21600\fR
+.TP
+\fBmsdfs root (S)\fR
+This boolean parameter is only available if
+Samba is configured and compiled with the \fB --with-msdfs\fR option. If set to yes,
+Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse
+the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory.
+Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic
+links of the form \fImsdfs:serverA\\shareA,serverB\\shareB
+\fRand so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree
+on Samba, refer to msdfs_setup.html
+.
+
+See also \fIhost msdfs
+\fR
+Default: \fBmsdfs root = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBname resolve order (G)\fR
+This option is used by the programs in the Samba
+suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order
+to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space
+separated string of name resolution options.
+
+The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They
+cause names to be resolved as follows :
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+lmhosts : Lookup an IP
+address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has
+no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the lmhosts(5)for details) then
+any name type matches for lookup.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+host : Do a standard host
+name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts
+\fR, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution
+is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this
+may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch.conf\fR
+file. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name
+type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise
+it is ignored.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+wins : Query a name with
+the IP address listed in the \fI wins server\fR parameter. If no WINS server has
+been specified this method will be ignored.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+bcast : Do a broadcast on
+each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR
+parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution
+methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally
+connected subnet.
+.RE
+.PP
+Default: \fBname resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBname resolve order = lmhosts bcast host
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined
+first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal
+system hostname lookup.
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBnetbios aliases (G)\fR
+This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd(8)will advertise as additional
+names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine
+to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is
+acting as a browse server or logon server none
+of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon
+servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised
+with these capabilities.
+
+See also \fInetbios
+name\fR.
+
+Default: \fBempty string (no additional names)\fR
+
+Example: \fBnetbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2\fR
+.TP
+\fBnetbios name (G)\fR
+This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba
+server is known. By default it is the same as the first component
+of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or
+logon server this name (or the first component
+of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are
+advertised under.
+
+See also \fInetbios
+aliases\fR.
+
+Default: \fBmachine DNS name\fR
+
+Example: \fBnetbios name = MYNAME\fR
+.TP
+\fBnetbios scope (G)\fR
+This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will
+operate under. This should not be set unless every machine
+on your LAN also sets this value.
+.TP
+\fBnis homedir (G)\fR
+Get the home share server from a NIS map. For
+UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory
+will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote
+server.
+
+When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory
+server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two
+network hops would be required to access the users home directory
+if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server
+for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can
+be very slow.
+
+This option allows Samba to return the home share as
+being on a different server to the logon server and as
+long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server,
+it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory
+server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it
+will consult the NIS map specified in \fIhomedir map\fR and return the server
+listed there.
+
+Note that for this option to work there must be a working
+NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also
+be a logon server.
+
+Default: \fBnis homedir = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBnon unix account range (G)\fR
+The non unix account range parameter specifies
+the range of 'user ids' that are allocated by the various 'non unix
+account' passdb backends. These backends allow
+the storage of passwords for users who don't exist in /etc/passwd.
+This is most often used for machine account creation.
+This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within
+it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.
+
+NOTE: These userids never appear on the system and Samba will never
+\&'become' these users. They are used only to ensure that the algorithmic
+RID mapping does not conflict with normal users.
+
+Default: \fBnon unix account range = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBnon unix account range = 10000-20000\fR
+.TP
+\fBnt acl support (S)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls whether
+smbd(8)will attempt to map
+UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists.
+This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases
+prior to 2.2.2.
+
+Default: \fBnt acl support = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBnt pipe support (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls whether
+smbd(8)will allow Windows NT
+clients to connect to the NT SMB specific IPC$
+pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left
+alone.
+
+Default: \fBnt pipe support = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBnull passwords (G)\fR
+Allow or disallow client access to accounts
+that have null passwords.
+
+See also smbpasswd (5).
+
+Default: \fBnull passwords = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBobey pam restrictions (G)\fR
+When Samba 2.2 is configured to enable PAM support
+(i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba
+should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The
+default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only
+and to ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba
+always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of \fIencrypt passwords = yes\fR
+\&. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response
+authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption.
+
+Default: \fBobey pam restrictions = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBonly user (S)\fR
+This is a boolean option that controls whether
+connections with usernames not in the \fIuser\fR
+list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a
+client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling
+this parameter will force the server to only user the login
+names from the \fIuser\fR list and is only really
+useful in shave level
+security.
+
+Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce
+usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for
+the [homes] section. To get around this you could use \fBuser =
+%S\fR which means your \fIuser\fR list
+will be just the service name, which for home directories is the
+name of the user.
+
+See also the \fIuser\fR
+parameter.
+
+Default: \fBonly user = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBonly guest (S)\fR
+A synonym for \fI guest only\fR.
+.TP
+\fBoplock break wait time (G)\fR
+This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in
+both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too
+quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock
+break request, then the network client can fail and not respond
+to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds)
+is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break
+request to such (broken) clients.
+
+\fBDO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ
+AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\fR.
+
+Default: \fBoplock break wait time = 0\fR
+.TP
+\fBoplock contention limit (S)\fR
+This is a \fBvery\fR advanced
+smbd(8)tuning option to
+improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple
+client contention for the same file.
+
+In brief it specifies a number, which causes smbdnot to
+grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of
+clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this
+limit. This causes \fBsmbd\fR to behave in a similar
+way to Windows NT.
+
+\fBDO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ
+AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\fR.
+
+Default: \fBoplock contention limit = 2\fR
+.TP
+\fBoplocks (S)\fR
+This boolean option tells \fBsmbd\fR whether to
+issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this
+share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve
+the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients
+to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this
+option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by
+default in Windows NT Servers). For more information see the file
+\fISpeed.txt\fR in the Samba \fIdocs/\fR
+directory.
+
+Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a
+share. See the \fI veto oplock files\fR parameter. On some systems
+oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This
+allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files,
+whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the
+\fIkernel oplocks\fR parameter for details.
+
+See also the \fIkernel
+oplocks\fR and \fI level2 oplocks\fR parameters.
+
+Default: \fBoplocks = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBos level (G)\fR
+This integer value controls what level Samba
+advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this
+parameter determines whether nmbd(8)
+has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the \fI WORKGROUP\fR in the local broadcast area.
+
+\fBNote :\fRBy default, Samba will win
+a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating
+systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This
+means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate
+a subnet for browsing purposes. See \fIBROWSING.txt
+\fRin the Samba \fIdocs/\fR directory
+for details.
+
+Default: \fBos level = 20\fR
+
+Example: \fBos level = 65 \fR
+.TP
+\fBos2 driver map (G)\fR
+The parameter is used to define the absolute
+path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver
+names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:
+
+<nt driver name> = <os2 driver
+name>.<device name>
+
+For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5
+printer driver would appear as \fBHP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP
+LaserJet 5L\fR.
+
+The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace
+problem described in the Samba
+Printing HOWTO. For more details on OS/2 clients, please
+refer to the OS2-Client-HOWTO
+containing in the Samba documentation.
+
+Default: \fBos2 driver map = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBpam password change (G)\fR
+With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2,
+this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control
+flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password
+changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in
+\fIpasswd program\fR.
+It should be possible to enable this without changing your
+\fIpasswd chat\fR
+parameter for most setups.
+
+Default: \fBpam password change = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBpanic action (G)\fR
+This is a Samba developer option that allows a
+system command to be called when either smbd(8)
+crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that
+a problem occurred.
+
+Default: \fBpanic action = <empty string>\fR
+
+Example: \fBpanic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"\fR
+.TP
+\fBpassdb backend (G)\fR
+This option allows the administrator to chose what
+backend in which to store passwords. This allows (for example) both
+smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile. Only one can
+be used at a time however, and experimental backends must still be selected
+(eg --with-tdbsam) at configure time.
+
+This paramater is in two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location'
+string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated
+by a : character.
+
+Available backends can include:
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBsmbpasswd\fR - The default smbpasswd
+backend. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBsmbpasswd_nua\fR - The smbpasswd
+backend, but with support for 'not unix accounts'.
+Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.
+
+See also \fInon unix account range\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBtdbsam\fR - The TDB based password storage
+backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb
+in the \fIprivate dir\fR directory.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBtdbsam_nua\fR - The TDB based password storage
+backend, with non unix account support. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb
+in the \fIprivate dir\fR directory.
+
+See also \fInon unix account range\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBldapsam\fR - The LDAP based passdb
+backend. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to
+\fBldap://localhost\fR)
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBldapsam_nua\fR - The LDAP based passdb
+backend, with non unix account support. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to
+\fBldap://localhost\fR)
+
+See also \fInon unix account range\fR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+\fBplugin\fR - Allows Samba to load an
+arbitary passdb backend from the .so specified as a compulsary argument.
+
+Any characters after the (optional) second : are passed to the plugin
+for its own processing
+.RE
+.PP
+
+Default: \fBpassdb backend = smbpasswd\fR
+
+Example: \fBpassdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb\fR
+
+Example: \fBpassdb backend = ldapsam_nua:ldaps://ldap.example.com\fR
+
+Example: \fBpassdb backend = plugin:/usr/local/samba/lib/my_passdb.so:my_plugin_args\fR
+.TP
+\fBpasswd chat (G)\fR
+This string controls the \fB"chat"\fR
+conversation that takes places between smbdand the local password changing
+program to change the user's password. The string describes a
+sequence of response-receive pairs that smbd(8)uses to determine what to send to the
+\fIpasswd program\fR
+and what to expect back. If the expected output is not
+received then the password is not changed.
+
+This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending
+on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS
+etc).
+
+Note that this parameter only is only used if the \fIunix
+password sync\fR parameter is set to yes. This
+sequence is then called \fBAS ROOT\fR when the SMB password
+in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old
+password cleartext. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password
+without knowing the text of the previous password. In the presence of NIS/YP,
+this means that the passwd program must be
+executed on the NIS master.
+
+The string can contain the macro \fI%n\fR which is substituted
+for the new password. The chat sequence can also contain the standard
+macros \\n, \\r, \\t and \\s to give line-feed,
+carriage-return, tab and space. The chat sequence string can also contain
+a '*' which matches any sequence of characters.
+Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces
+in them into a single string.
+
+If the send string in any part of the chat sequence
+is a full stop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly,
+if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.
+
+If the \fIpam
+password change\fR parameter is set to true, the chat pairs
+may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result,
+not any particular output. The \\n macro is ignored for PAM conversions.
+
+See also \fIunix password
+sync\fR, \fI passwd program\fR , \fIpasswd chat debug\fR and \fIpam password change\fR.
+
+Default: \fBpasswd chat = *new*password* %n\\n
+*new*password* %n\\n *changed*\fR
+
+Example: \fBpasswd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n
+"*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Password
+changed*"\fR
+.TP
+\fBpasswd chat debug (G)\fR
+This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script
+parameter is run in \fBdebug\fR mode. In this mode the
+strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed
+in the smbd(8)log with a
+\fIdebug level\fR
+of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords
+to be seen in the \fBsmbd\fR log. It is available to help
+Samba admins debug their \fIpasswd chat\fR scripts
+when calling the \fIpasswd program\fR and should
+be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the
+\fIpam password change\fR
+paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.
+
+See also \fIpasswd chat\fR
+, \fIpam password change\fR
+, \fIpasswd program\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBpasswd chat debug = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBpasswd program (G)\fR
+The name of a program that can be used to set
+UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR
+will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for
+existence before calling the password changing program.
+
+Also note that many passwd programs insist in \fBreasonable
+\fRpasswords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion
+of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients
+(such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending
+it.
+
+\fBNote\fR that if the \fIunix
+password sync\fR parameter is set to true
+then this program is called \fBAS ROOT\fR
+before the SMB password in the smbpasswd(5)
+file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then
+\fBsmbd\fR will fail to change the SMB password also
+(this is by design).
+
+If the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter
+is set this parameter \fBMUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS\fR
+for \fBALL\fR programs called, and must be examined
+for security implications. Note that by default \fIunix
+password sync\fR is set to false.
+
+See also \fIunix
+password sync\fR.
+
+Default: \fBpasswd program = /bin/passwd\fR
+
+Example: \fBpasswd program = /sbin/npasswd %u\fR
+.TP
+\fBpassword level (G)\fR
+Some client/server combinations have difficulty
+with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for
+Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper
+case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when
+using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98
+family of operating systems. These clients upper case clear
+text passwords even when NT LM 0.12 selected by the protocol
+negotiation request/response.
+
+This parameter defines the maximum number of characters
+that may be upper case in passwords.
+
+For example, say the password given was "FRED". If \fI password level\fR is set to 1, the following combinations
+would be tried if "FRED" failed:
+
+"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"
+
+If \fIpassword level\fR was set to 2,
+the following combinations would also be tried:
+
+"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", ..
+
+And so on.
+
+The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely
+it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single
+case password. However, you should be aware that use of this
+parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to
+process a new connection.
+
+A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be
+made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.
+
+Default: \fBpassword level = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBpassword level = 4\fR
+.TP
+\fBpassword server (G)\fR
+By specifying the name of another SMB server (such
+as a WinNT box) with this option, and using \fBsecurity = domain
+\fRor \fBsecurity = server\fR you can get Samba
+to do all its username/password validation via a remote server.
+
+This option sets the name of the password server to use.
+It must be a NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is
+different from its Internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS
+name to the lmhosts file which is stored in the same directory
+as the \fIsmb.conf\fR file.
+
+The name of the password server is looked up using the
+parameter \fIname
+resolve order\fR and so may resolved
+by any method and order described in that parameter.
+
+The password server much be a machine capable of using
+the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in
+user level security mode.
+
+\fBNOTE:\fR Using a password server
+means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your
+password server. \fBDO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT
+YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST\fR.
+
+Never point a Samba server at itself for password
+serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba
+server!
+
+The name of the password server takes the standard
+substitutions, but probably the only useful one is \fI%m
+\fR, which means the Samba server will use the incoming
+client as the password server. If you use this then you better
+trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!
+
+If the \fIsecurity\fR parameter is set to
+domain, then the list of machines in this
+option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the
+Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively
+in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls
+to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using \fB security = domain\fR is that if you list several hosts in the
+\fIpassword server\fR option then \fBsmbd
+\fRwill try each in turn till it finds one that responds. This
+is useful in case your primary server goes down.
+
+If the \fIpassword server\fR option is set
+to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the
+Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by
+doing a query for the name WORKGROUP<1C>
+and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP
+addresses from the name resolution source.
+
+If the \fIsecurity\fR parameter is
+set to server, then there are different
+restrictions that \fBsecurity = domain\fR doesn't
+suffer from:
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+You may list several password servers in
+the \fIpassword server\fR parameter, however if an
+\fBsmbd\fR makes a connection to a password server,
+and then the password server fails, no more users will be able
+to be authenticated from this \fBsmbd\fR. This is a
+restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in \fBsecurity = server
+\fRmode and cannot be fixed in Samba.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+If you are using a Windows NT server as your
+password server then you will have to ensure that your users
+are able to login from the Samba server, as when in \fB security = server\fR mode the network logon will appear to
+come from there rather than from the users workstation.
+.RE
+.PP
+See also the \fIsecurity
+\fRparameter.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBpassword server = <empty string>\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBpassword server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBpassword server = *\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBpath (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies a directory to which
+the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of
+printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to
+being submitted to the host for printing.
+
+For a printable service offering guest access, the service
+should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and
+have the sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but
+you probably won't get the results you expect if you do
+otherwise.
+
+Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR in the path
+will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using
+on this connection. Any occurrences of \fI%m\fR
+will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are
+connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting
+up pseudo home directories for users.
+
+Note that this path will be based on \fIroot dir\fR if one was specified.
+
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+
+Example: \fBpath = /home/fred\fR
+.TP
+\fBposix locking (S)\fR
+The \fBsmbd(8)\fR
+daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients.
+The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX
+locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are
+consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing
+the files via a non-SMB method (e.g. NFS or local file access).
+You should never need to disable this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBposix locking = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBpostexec (S)\fR
+This option specifies a command to be run
+whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual
+substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some
+systems.
+
+An interesting example may be to unmount server
+resources:
+
+\fBpostexec = /etc/umount /cdrom\fR
+
+See also \fIpreexec\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
+
+Example: \fBpostexec = echo \\"%u disconnected from %S
+from %m (%I)\\" >> /tmp/log\fR
+.TP
+\fBpostscript (S)\fR
+This parameter forces a printer to interpret
+the print files as PostScript. This is done by adding a %!
+to the start of print output.
+
+This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist
+in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then
+confuses your printer.
+
+Default: \fBpostscript = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBpreexec (S)\fR
+This option specifies a command to be run whenever
+the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.
+
+An interesting example is to send the users a welcome
+message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here
+is an example:
+
+\fBpreexec = csh -c 'echo \\"Welcome to %S!\\" |
+/usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & \fR
Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)
-See also postexec
-
-.B Default:
- none (no command executed)
-
-.B Example:
- preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log
-
-.SS preferred master (G)
-This boolean parameter controls if Samba is a preferred master browser
-for its workgroup. Setting this gives it a slight edge in elections
-and also means it will automatically start an election when it starts
-up.
-
-It is on by default.
-
-.SS preload
-This is an alias for "auto services"
-
-.SS preserve case (S)
-
-This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the
-client passes, or if they are forced to be the "default" case.
-
-.B Default:
- preserve case = no
-
-See the section on "NAME MANGLING" for a fuller discussion.
-
-.SS print command (S)
-After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be
-used via a system() call to process the spool file. Typically the command
-specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but
-there is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove the
-spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the spool file when
-it has been processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool
-files.
-
-The print command is simply a text string. It will be used verbatim,
-with two exceptions: All occurrences of "%s" will be replaced by the
-appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of "%p" will be
-replaced by the appropriate printer name. The spool file name is
-generated automatically by the server, the printer name is discussed
-below.
-
-The full path name will be used for the filename if %s is not preceded
-by a /. If you don't like this (it can stuff up some lpq output) then
-use %f instead. Any occurances of %f get replaced by the spool
-filename without the full path at the front.
-
-The print command MUST contain at least one occurrence of "%s" or %f -
-the "%p" is optional. At the time a job is submitted, if no printer
-name is supplied the "%p" will be silently removed from the printer
-command.
-
-If specified in the [global] section, the print command given will be used
-for any printable service that does not have its own print command specified.
-
-If there is neither a specified print command for a printable service nor a
-global print command, spool files will be created but not processed and (most
-importantly) not removed.
-
-Note that printing may fail on some unixes from the "nobody"
-account. If this happens then create an alternative guest account that
-can print and set the "guest account" in the [global] section.
-
-You can form quite complex print commands by realising that they are
-just passed to a shell. For example the following will log a print
-job, print the file, then remove it. Note that ; is the usual
-separator for command in shell scripts.
-
-print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s
-
-You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you
-normally print files on your system.
-
-.B Default:
- print command = lpr -r -P %p %s
-
-.B Example:
- print command = /usr/local/samba/myprintscript %p %s
-.SS print ok (S)
-See
-.B printable.
-.SS printable (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'print ok'.
-
-If this parameter is 'yes', then clients may open, write to and submit spool
-files on the directory specified for the service.
-
-Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path
-(user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data. The 'read only'
-parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource.
-
-.B Default:
- printable = no
-
-.B Example:
- printable = yes
-
-.SS printing (G)
-This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted
-on your system, and also affects the default values for the "print
-command", "lpq command" and "lprm command".
-
-Currently three printing styles are supported. They are "printing =
-bsd", "printing = sysv", "printing = hpux" and "printing = aix".
-
-To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when using
-these three options use the "testparm" program.
-
-
-.SS printcap name (G)
-This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap
-name used by the server (usually /etc/printcap). See the discussion of the
-[printers] section above for reasons why you might want to do this.
-
-For those of you without a printcap (say on SysV) you can just create a
-minimal file that looks like a printcap and set "printcap name =" in
-[global] to point at it.
+See also \fIpreexec close
+\fRand \fIpostexec
+\fR\&.
+
+Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
+
+Example: \fBpreexec = echo \\"%u connected to %S from %m
+(%I)\\" >> /tmp/log\fR
+.TP
+\fBpreexec close (S)\fR
+This boolean option controls whether a non-zero
+return code from \fIpreexec
+\fRshould close the service being connected to.
+
+Default: \fBpreexec close = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBpreferred master (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls if nmbd(8)is a preferred master browser
+for its workgroup.
+
+If this is set to true, on startup, \fBnmbd\fR
+will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in
+winning the election. It is recommended that this parameter is
+used in conjunction with \fB\fI domain master\fB = yes\fR, so that \fB nmbd\fR can guarantee becoming a domain master.
+
+Use this option with caution, because if there are several
+hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred
+master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically
+and continuously attempt to become the local master browser.
+This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing
+capabilities.
+
+See also \fIos level\fR
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBpreferred master = auto\fR
+.TP
+\fBprefered master (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fI preferred master\fR for people who cannot spell :-).
+.TP
+\fBpreload\fR
+This is a list of services that you want to be
+automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful
+for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be
+visible.
+
+Note that if you just want all printers in your
+printcap file loaded then the \fIload printers\fR option is easier.
+
+Default: \fBno preloaded services\fR
+
+Example: \fBpreload = fred lp colorlp\fR
+.TP
+\fBpreserve case (S)\fR
+This controls if new filenames are created
+with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to
+be the \fIdefault case
+\fR\&.
+
+Default: \fBpreserve case = yes\fR
+
+See the section on NAME
+MANGLING for a fuller discussion.
+.TP
+\fBprint command (S)\fR
+After a print job has finished spooling to
+a service, this command will be used via a \fBsystem()\fR
+call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will
+submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there
+is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove
+the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the
+spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to
+manually remove old spool files.
+
+The print command is simply a text string. It will be used
+verbatim, with two exceptions: All occurrences of \fI%s
+\fRand \fI%f\fR will be replaced by the
+appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of \fI%p
+\fRwill be replaced by the appropriate printer name. The
+spool file name is generated automatically by the server. The
+\fI%J\fR macro can be used to access the job
+name as transmitted by the client.
+
+The print command \fBMUST\fR contain at least
+one occurrence of \fI%s\fR or \fI%f
+\fR- the \fI%p\fR is optional. At the time
+a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the \fI%p
+\fRwill be silently removed from the printer command.
+
+If specified in the [global] section, the print command given
+will be used for any printable service that does not have its own
+print command specified.
+
+If there is neither a specified print command for a
+printable service nor a global print command, spool files will
+be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.
+
+Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the
+nobody account. If this happens then create
+an alternative guest account that can print and set the \fIguest account\fR
+in the [global] section.
+
+You can form quite complex print commands by realizing
+that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following
+will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that
+\&';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.
+
+\fBprint command = echo Printing %s >>
+/tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s\fR
+
+You may have to vary this command considerably depending
+on how you normally print files on your system. The default for
+the parameter varies depending on the setting of the \fIprinting\fR parameter.
+
+Default: For \fBprinting = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG
+or PLP :\fR
+
+\fBprint command = lpr -r -P%p %s\fR
+
+For \fBprinting = SYSV or HPUX :\fR
+
+\fBprint command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s\fR
+
+For \fBprinting = SOFTQ :\fR
+
+\fBprint command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s\fR
+
+Example: \fBprint command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript
+%p %s\fR
+.TP
+\fBprint ok (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fIprintable\fR.
+.TP
+\fBprintable (S)\fR
+If this parameter is yes, then
+clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory
+specified for the service.
+
+Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing
+to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling
+of print data. The \fIwriteable
+\fRparameter controls only non-printing access to
+the resource.
+
+Default: \fBprintable = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBprintcap (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fI printcap name\fR.
+.TP
+\fBprintcap name (G)\fR
+This parameter may be used to override the
+compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually \fI /etc/printcap\fR). See the discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons
+why you might want to do this.
+
+On System V systems that use \fBlpstat\fR to
+list available printers you can use \fBprintcap name = lpstat
+\fRto automatically obtain lists of available printers. This
+is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in
+Samba (this includes most System V based systems). If \fI printcap name\fR is set to \fBlpstat\fR on
+these systems then Samba will launch \fBlpstat -v\fR and
+attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list.
A minimal printcap file would look something like this:
-print1|My Printer 1
-print2|My Printer 2
-print3|My Printer 3
-print4|My Printer 4
-print5|My Printer 5
-
-where the | separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the second
-alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment.
-
-NOTE: Under AIX the default printcap name is "/etc/qconfig". Samba
-will assume the file is in AIX "qconfig" format if the string
-"/qconfig" appears in the printcap filename.
-
-.B Default:
- printcap name = /etc/printcap
-
-.B Example:
- printcap name = /etc/myprintcap
-.SS printer (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'printer name'.
-
-This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled
-through a printable service will be sent.
-
-If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used
-for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified.
-
-.B Default:
- none (but may be 'lp' on many systems)
-
-.B Example:
- printer name = laserwriter
-.SS printer name (S)
-See
-.B printer.
-.SS protocol (G)
-The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will
-be supported by the server.
-
-Possible values are CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 and NT1. The relative
-merits of each are discussed in the README file.
-
-.B Default:
- protocol = NT1
-
-.B Example:
- protocol = LANMAN1
-.SS public (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'guest ok'.
-
-If this parameter is 'yes' for a service, then no password is required
-to connect to the service. Privileges will be those of the guest
-account.
-
-See the section below on user/password validation for more information about
-this option.
-
-.B Default:
- public = no
-
-.B Example:
- public = yes
-.SS read list (S)
-This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a
-service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will
-not be given write access, no matter what the "read only" option
-is set to. The list can include group names using the @group syntax.
-
-See also the "write list" option
-
-.B Default:
- read list =
-
-.B Example:
- read list = mary, @students
-
-.SS read only (S)
-See
-.B writable
-and
-.B write ok.
-Note that this is an inverted synonym for writable and write ok.
-.SS read prediction (G)
-This options enables or disables the read prediction code used to
-speed up reads from the server. When enabled the server will try to
-pre-read data from the last accessed file that was opened read-only
-while waiting for packets.
-
-.SS Default:
- read prediction = False
-
-.SS Example:
- read prediction = True
-.SS read raw (G)
-This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw reads when
-transferring data to clients.
-
-If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet. This
-typically provides a major performance benefit.
-
-However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size incorrectly
-or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and for these clients you
-may need to disable raw reads.
-
-In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left
-severely alone. See also
-.B write raw.
-
-.B Default:
- read raw = yes
-
-.B Example:
- read raw = no
-.SS read size (G)
-
-The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with
-network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in
-several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and
-SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing
-the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or
-in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before
-all the data has been read from disk.
-
-This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and network access
-are similar, having very little effect when the speed of one is much
-greater than the other.
-
-The default value is 2048, but very little experimentation has been
-done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely that the best
-value will vary greatly between systems anyway. A value over 65536 is
-pointless and will cause you to allocate memory unnecessarily.
-
-.B Default:
- read size = 2048
-
-.B Example:
- read size = 8192
-
-.SS revalidate (S)
-
-This options controls whether Samba will allow a previously validated
-username/password pair to be used to attach to a share. Thus if you
-connect to \\\\server\\share1 then to \\\\server\\share2 it won't
-automatically allow the client to request connection to the second
-share as the same username as the first without a password.
-
-If "revalidate" is True then the client will be denied automatic
-access as the same username.
-
-.B Default:
- revalidate = False
-
-.B Example:
- revalidate = True
-
-.SS root (G)
-See
-.B root directory.
-.SS root dir (G)
-See
-.B root directory.
-.SS root directory (G)
-Synonyms for this parameter are 'root dir' and 'root'.
-
-The server will chroot() to this directory on startup. This is not
-strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the server
-will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. It may
-also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the
-filesystem, or attempts to use .. in file names to access other
-directories (depending on the setting of the "wide links" parameter).
-
-Adding a "root dir" entry other than "/" adds an extra level of security,
-but at a price. It absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not
-in the sub-tree specified in the "root dir" option, *including* some files
-needed for complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability
-of the server you will need to mirror some system files into the "root dir"
-tree. In particular you will need to mirror /etc/passwd (or a subset of it),
-and any binaries or configuration files needed for printing (if required).
-The set of files that must be mirrored is operating system dependent.
-
-.B Default:
- root directory = /
-
-.B Example:
- root directory = /homes/smb
-.SS security (G)
-This option does affects how clients respond to Samba.
-
-The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations
-to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide based on this bit
-whether (and how) to transfer user and password information to the server.
-
-The default is "security=SHARE", mainly because that was the only
-option at one stage.
-
-The alternatives are "security = user" or "security = server".
-
-If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their usernames on the
-unix machine then you will want to use "security = user". If you
-mostly use usernames that don't exist on the unix box then use
-"security = share".
-
-There is a bug in WfWg that may affect your decision. When in user
-level security a WfWg client will totally ignore the password you type
-in the "connect drive" dialog box. This makes it very difficult (if
-not impossible) to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the
-user that you are logged into WfWg as.
-
-If you use "security = server" then Samba will try to validate the
-username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT
-box. If this fails it will revert to "security = USER".
-
-See the "password server" option for more details.
-
-.B Default:
- security = SHARE
-
-.B Example:
- security = USER
-.SS server string (G)
-This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in
-print manager and next to the IPC connection in "net view". It can be
-any string that you wish to show to your users.
-
-Note that it DOES NOT affect the string that appears in browse
-lists. That is controlled by a nmbd command line option instead.
-
-A %v will be replaced with the Samba version number.
-
-A %h will be replaced with the hostname.
-
-.B Default:
- server string = Samba %v
-
-.B Example:
- server string = University of GNUs Samba Server
-
-.SS smbrun (G)
-This sets the full path to the smbrun binary. This defaults to the
-value in the Makefile.
-
-You must get this path right for many services to work correctly.
-
-.B Default: taken from Makefile
-
-.B Example:
- smbrun = /usr/local/samba/bin/smbrun
-
-.SS short preserve case (S)
-
-This controls if new short filenames are created with the case that
-the client passes, or if they are forced to be the "default" case.
-
-.B Default:
- short preserve case = no
-
-See the section on "NAME MANGLING" for a fuller discussion.
-
-.SS root preexec (S)
-
-This is the same as preexec except that the command is run as
-root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as cdroms) before
-a connection is finalised.
-
-.SS root postexec (S)
-
-This is the same as postexec except that the command is run as
-root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as cdroms) after
-a connection is closed.
-
-.SS set directory (S)
-If 'set directory = no', then users of the service may not use the setdir
-command to change directory.
-
-The setdir comand is only implemented in the Digital Pathworks client. See the
-Pathworks documentation for details.
-.B Default:
- set directory = no
-
-.B Example:
- set directory = yes
-
-.SS share modes (S)
-
-This enables or disables the honouring of the "share modes" during a
-file open. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or
-write access to a file.
-
-These open modes are not directly supported by unix, so they are
-simulated using lock files in the "lock directory". The "lock
-directory" specified in smb.conf must be readable by all users.
-
-The share modes that are enabled by this option are DENY_DOS,
-DENY_ALL, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE, DENY_NONE and DENY_FCB.
-
-Enabling this option gives full share compatability but may cost a bit
-of processing time on the unix server. They are enabled by default.
-
-.B Default:
- share modes = yes
-
-.B Example:
- share modes = no
-
-.SS socket options (G)
-This option (which can also be invoked with the -O command line
-option) allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with
-the client.
-
-Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating
-systems which allow the connection to be tuned.
-
-This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for
-optimal performance for your local network. There is no way that Samba
-can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you must
-experiment and choose them yourself. I strongly suggest you read the
-appropriate documentation for your operating system first (perhaps
-"man setsockopt" will help).
-
-You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket
-option" when you supply an option. This means you either mis-typed it
-or you need to add an include file to includes.h for your OS. If the
-latter is the case please send the patch to me
-(samba-bugs@anu.edu.au).
-
-Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you
-like, as long as your OS allows it.
-
-This is the list of socket options currently settable using this
-option:
-
- SO_KEEPALIVE
-
- SO_REUSEADDR
-
- SO_BROADCAST
-
- TCP_NODELAY
-
- IPTOS_LOWDELAY
-
- IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
-
- SO_SNDBUF *
-
- SO_RCVBUF *
-
- SO_SNDLOWAT *
-
- SO_RCVLOWAT *
-
-Those marked with a * take an integer argument. The others can
-optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by
-default they will be enabled if you don't specify 1 or 0.
-
-To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION=VALUE for example
-SO_SNDBUF=8192. Note that you must not have any spaces before or after
-the = sign.
-
-If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be
-
-socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY
-
-If you have an almost unloaded local network and you don't mind a lot
-of extra CPU usage in the server then you could try
-
-socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY
-
-If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting
-IPTOS_THROUGHPUT.
-
-Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail
-completely. Use these options with caution!
-
-.B Default:
- no socket options
-
-.B Example:
- socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY
-
-
-
-
-.SS status (G)
-This enables or disables logging of connections to a status file that
-smbstatus can read.
-
-With this disabled smbstatus won't be able to tell you what
-connections are active.
-
-.B Default:
- status = yes
-
-.B Example:
- status = no
-
-.SS strip dot (G)
-This is a boolean that controls whether to strup trailing dots off
-filenames. This helps with some CDROMs that have filenames ending in a
-single dot.
-
-NOTE: This option is now obsolete, and may be removed in future. You
-should use the "mangled map" option instead as it is much more
-general.
-
-.SS strict locking (S)
-This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the
-server. When this is set to yes the server will check every read and
-write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can
-be slow on some systems.
-
-When strict locking is "no" the server does file lock checks only when
-the client explicitly asks for them.
-
-Well behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important,
-so in the vast majority of cases "strict locking = no" is preferable.
-
-.B Default:
- strict locking = no
-
-.B Example:
- strict locking = yes
-
-.SS sync always (S)
-
-This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always
-be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is
-false then the server will be guided by the clients request in each
-write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write
-should be synchronous). If this is true then every write will be
-followed by a fsync() call to ensure the data is written to disk.
-
-.B Default:
- sync always = no
-
-.B Example:
- sync always = yes
-
-.SS time offset (G)
-This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to
-local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs
-that have incorrect daylight saving time handling.
-
-.B Default:
- time offset = 0
-
-.B Example:
- time offset = 60
-
-.SS user (S)
-See
-.B username.
-.SS username (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'user'.
-
-Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the
-supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right).
-
-The username= line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply it's own
-username. This is the case for the coreplus protocol or where your
-users have different WfWg usernames to unix usernames. In both these
-cases you may also be better using the \\\\server\\share%user syntax
-instead.
-
-The username= line is not a great solution in many cases as it means Samba
-will try to validate the supplied password against each of the
-usernames in the username= line in turn. This is slow and a bad idea for
-lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. You may get timeouts or
-security breaches using this parameter unwisely.
-
-Samba relies on the underlying unix security. This parameter does not
-restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to
-what usernames might correspond to the supplied password. Users can
-login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more
-damage than if they started a telnet session. The daemon runs as the
-user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot
-do.
-
-To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the
-"valid users=" line.
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a @ then the name will be looked up
-in the groups file and will expand to a list of all users in the group
-of that name. Note that searching though a groups file can take quite
-some time, and some clients may time out during the search.
-
-See the section below on username/password validation for more information
-on how this parameter determines access to the services.
-
-.B Default:
- The guest account if a guest service, else the name of the service.
-
-.B Examples:
- username = fred
- username = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup
-
-.SS username map (G)
-
-This option allows you to to specify a file containing a mapping of
-usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several
-purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on dos or
-windows machines to those that the unix box uses. The other is to map
-multiple users to a single username so that they can more easily share
-files.
-
-The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should contain a single
-unix username on the left then a '=' followed by a list of usernames
-on the right. The list of usernames on the right may contain names of
-the form @group in which case they will match any unix username in
-that group. The special client name '*' is a wildcard and matches any
-name.
-
-The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and
-comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the '='
-signs. If the supplied name matrches any of the names on the right
-hand side then it is replaced with the name on the left. Processing
-then continues with the next line.
-
-If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is ignored
-
-For example to map from he name "admin" or "administrator" to the unix
-name "root" you would use
-
- root = admin administrator
-
-Or to map anyone in the unix group "system" to the unix name "sys" you
-would use
-
- sys = @system
-
-You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file.
-
-Note that the remapping is applied to all occurances of
-usernames. Thus if you connect to "\\\\server\\fred" and "fred" is
-remapped to "mary" then you will actually be connecting to
-"\\\\server\\mary" and will need to supply a password suitable for
-"mary" not "fred". The only exception to this is the username passwed
-to the "password server" (if you have one). The password server will
-receive whatever username the client supplies without modification.
-
-Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is
-with printing. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting
-print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the
-print job.
-
-.B Default
- no username map
-
-.B Example
- username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map
-
-.SS valid chars (S)
-
-The option allows you to specify additional characters that should be
-considered valid by the server in filenames. This is particularly
-useful for national character sets, such as adding u-umlaut or a-ring.
-
-The option takes a list of characters in either integer or character
-form with spaces between them. If you give two characters with a colon
-between them then it will be taken as an lowercase:uppercase pair.
-
-If you have an editor capable of entering the characters into the
-config file then it is probably easiest to use this method. Otherwise
-you can specify the characters in octal, decimal or hexidecimal form
-using the usual C notation.
-
-For example to add the single character 'Z' to the charset (which is a
-pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could do one of the
-following
-
-valid chars = Z
-valid chars = z:Z
-valid chars = 0132:0172
-
-The last two examples above actually add two characters, and alters
-the uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately.
-
-.B Default
- Samba defaults to using a reasonable set of valid characters
- for english systems
-
-.B Example
- valid chars = 0345:0305 0366:0326 0344:0304
-
-The above example allows filenames to have the swedish characters in
-them.
-
-.SS valid users (S)
-This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this
-service. A name starting with @ is interpreted as a unix group.
-
-If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. If a username
-is in both this list and the "invalid users" list then access is
-denied for that user.
-
-The current servicename is substituted for %S. This is useful in the
-[homes] section.
-
-See also "invalid users"
-
-.B Default
- No valid users list. (anyone can login)
-
-.B Example
- valid users = greg, @pcusers
-
-.SS volume (S)
-This allows you to override the volume label returned for a
-share. Useful for CDROMs whos installation programs insist on a
-particular volume label.
-
-The default is the name of the share
-
-.SS wide links (S)
-This parameter controls whether or not links in the Unix file system may be
-followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the directory tree
-exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access
-only to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.
-
-.B Default:
- wide links = yes
-
-.B Example:
- wide links = no
-
-.SS workgroup (G)
-
-This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when
-queried by clients. This can be different to the workgroup specified
-in the nmbd configuration, but it is probably best if you set them to
-the same value.
-
-.B Default:
- set in the Makefile
-
-.B Example:
- workgroup = MYGROUP
+.sp
+.nf
+ print1|My Printer 1
+ print2|My Printer 2
+ print3|My Printer 3
+ print4|My Printer 4
+ print5|My Printer 5
+
+.sp
+.fi
+
+where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact
+that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba
+that it's a comment.
+
+\fBNOTE\fR: Under AIX the default printcap
+name is \fI/etc/qconfig\fR. Samba will assume the
+file is in AIX \fIqconfig\fR format if the string
+\fIqconfig\fR appears in the printcap filename.
+
+Default: \fBprintcap name = /etc/printcap\fR
+
+Example: \fBprintcap name = /etc/myprintcap\fR
+.TP
+\fBprinter admin (S)\fR
+This is a list of users that can do anything to
+printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC
+(usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always
+has admin rights.
+
+Default: \fBprinter admin = <empty string>\fR
+
+Example: \fBprinter admin = admin, @staff\fR
+.TP
+\fBprinter driver (S)\fR
+\fBNote :\fRThis is a deprecated
+parameter and will be removed in the next major release
+following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
+the Samba 2.2. Printing
+HOWTOfor more information
+on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
+
+This option allows you to control the string
+that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver
+associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT
+then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your
+system.
+
+You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case
+sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your
+system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should
+first try with no \fI printer driver\fR option set and the client will
+give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are
+shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.
+
+See also \fIprinter
+driver file\fR.
+
+Example: \fBprinter driver = HP LaserJet 4L\fR
+.TP
+\fBprinter driver file (G)\fR
+\fBNote :\fRThis is a deprecated
+parameter and will be removed in the next major release
+following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
+the Samba 2.2. Printing
+HOWTOfor more information
+on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
+
+This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver
+definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is
+to be found. If this is not set, the default is :
+
+\fISAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY
+/lib/printers.def\fR
+
+This file is created from Windows 95 \fImsprint.inf
+\fRfiles found on the Windows 95 client system. For more
+details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95
+clients, see the outdated documentation file in the \fIdocs/\fR
+directory, \fIPRINTER_DRIVER.txt\fR.
+
+See also \fI printer driver location\fR.
+
+Default: \fBNone (set in compile).\fR
+
+Example: \fBprinter driver file =
+/usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def\fR
+.TP
+\fBprinter driver location (S)\fR
+\fBNote :\fRThis is a deprecated
+parameter and will be removed in the next major release
+following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
+the Samba 2.2. Printing
+HOWTOfor more information
+on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
+
+This parameter tells clients of a particular printer
+share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic
+installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up
+to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to
+
+\fB\\\\MACHINE\\PRINTER$\fR
+
+Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server,
+and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver
+files. For more details on setting this up see the outdated documentation
+file in the \fIdocs/\fR directory, \fI PRINTER_DRIVER.txt\fR.
+
+See also \fI printer driver file\fR.
+
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+
+Example: \fBprinter driver location = \\\\MACHINE\\PRINTER$
+\fR.TP
+\fBprinter name (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the name of the printer
+to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.
+
+If specified in the [global] section, the printer
+name given will be used for any printable service that does
+not have its own printer name specified.
+
+Default: \fBnone (but may be lp
+on many systems)\fR
+
+Example: \fBprinter name = laserwriter\fR
+.TP
+\fBprinter (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fI printer name\fR.
+.TP
+\fBprinting (S)\fR
+This parameters controls how printer status
+information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the
+default values for the \fIprint command\fR,
+\fIlpq command\fR, \fIlppause command
+\fR, \fIlpresume command\fR, and
+\fIlprm command\fR if specified in the
+[global] section.
+
+Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are
+BSD, AIX,
+LPRNG, PLP,
+SYSV, HPUX,
+QNX, SOFTQ,
+and CUPS.
+
+To see what the defaults are for the other print
+commands when using the various options use the testparm(1)program.
+
+This option can be set on a per printer basis
+
+See also the discussion in the [printers] section.
+.TP
+\fBprivate dir (G)\fR
+This parameters defines the directory
+smbd will use for storing such files as \fIsmbpasswd\fR
+and \fIsecrets.tdb\fR.
+
+Default :\fBprivate dir = ${prefix}/private\fR
+.TP
+\fBprotocol (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fImax protocol\fR.
+.TP
+\fBpublic (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fIguest
+ok\fR.
+.TP
+\fBqueuepause command (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the command to be
+executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.
+
+This command should be a program or script which takes
+a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue,
+such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.
+
+This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups,
+but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95
+and NT.
+
+If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name
+is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
+
+Note that it is good practice to include the absolute
+path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the
+server.
-.SS write ok (S)
-See
-.B writable
-and
-.B read only.
-.SS writable (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is 'write ok'. An inverted synonym is 'read only'.
-
-If this parameter is 'no', then users of a service may not create or modify
-files in the service's directory.
-
-Note that a printable service ('printable = yes') will ALWAYS allow
-writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via
-spooling operations.
-
-.B Default:
- writable = no
-
-.B Examples:
- read only = no
- writable = yes
- write ok = yes
-.SS write list (S)
-This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a
-service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be
-given write access, no matter what the "read only" option is set
-to. The list can include group names using the @group syntax.
-
-Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then
-they will be given write access.
-
-See also the "read list" option
-
-.B Default:
- write list =
-
-.B Example:
- write list = admin, root, @staff
-
-.SS write raw (G)
-This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw writes when
-transferring data from clients.
-
-.B Default:
- write raw = yes
-
-.B Example:
- write raw = no
-.SH NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION
-There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a
-service. The server follows the following steps in determining if it
-will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the steps fail
-then the connection request is rejected. If one of the steps pass then
-the following steps are not checked.
-
-If the service is marked "guest only = yes" then steps 1 to 5 are skipped
-
-Step 1: If the client has passed a username/password pair and that
-username/password pair is validated by the unix systems password
-programs then the connection is made as that username. Note that this
-includes the \\\\server\\service%username method of passing a username.
-
-Step 2: If the client has previously registered a username with the
-system and now supplies a correct password for that username then the
-connection is allowed.
-
-Step 3: The clients netbios name and any previously used user names
-are checked against the supplied password, if they match then the
-connection is allowed as the corresponding user.
-
-Step 4: If the client has previously validated a username/password
-pair with the server and the client has passed the validation token
-then that username is used. This step is skipped if "revalidate = yes"
-for this service.
-
-Step 5: If a "user = " field is given in the smb.conf file for the
-service and the client has supplied a password, and that password
-matches (according to the unix systems password checking) with one of
-the usernames from the user= field then the connection is made as the
-username in the "user=" line. If one of the username in the user= list
-begins with a @ then that name expands to a list of names in the group
-of the same name.
-
-Step 6: If the service is a guest service then a connection is made as
-the username given in the "guest account =" for the service,
-irrespective of the supplied password.
-
-
-.SH WARNINGS
-Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces,
-your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway,
-so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility.
-
-On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit service
-names to eight characters. Smbd has no such limitation, but attempts
-to connect from such clients will fail if they truncate the service names.
-For this reason you should probably keep your service names down to eight
-characters in length.
-
-Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life for an
-administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be
-tricky. Take extreme care when designing these sections. In particular,
-ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct.
-.SH VERSION
-This man page is (mostly) correct for version 1.9.00 of the Samba suite, plus some
-of the recent patches to it. These notes will necessarily lag behind
-development of the software, so it is possible that your version of
-the server has extensions or parameter semantics that differ from or are not
-covered by this man page. Please notify these to the address below for
-rectification.
-
-Prior to version 1.5.21 of the Samba suite, the configuration file was
-radically different (more primitive). If you are using a version earlier than
-1.8.05, it is STRONGLY recommended that you upgrade.
-.SH OPTIONS
-Not applicable.
-
-.SH FILES
-Not applicable.
-
-.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
-Not applicable.
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.B smbd(8),
-.B smbclient(1),
-.B nmbd(8),
-.B testparm(1),
-.B testprns(1),
-.B lpq(1),
-.B hosts_access(5)
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-[This section under construction]
-
-Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file. The
-log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the
-smbd (see smbd(8)) command line.
-
-The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used
-by the server. If you have problems, set the debug level to 3 and peruse the
-log files.
-
-Most messages are reasonably self-explanatory. Unfortunately, at time of
-creation of this man page the source code is still too fluid to warrant
-describing each and every diagnostic. At this stage your best bet is still
-to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the
-diagnostics you are seeing.
-
-.SH BUGS
-None known.
-
-Please send bug reports, comments and so on to:
-
-.RS 3
-.B samba-bugs@anu.edu.au (Andrew Tridgell)
-
-.RS 3
-or to the mailing list
-.RE
+Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting
+\fB\fR
+Example: \fBqueuepause command = disable %p\fR
+.TP
+\fBqueueresume command (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies the command to be
+executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It
+is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the
+previous parameter (\fI queuepause command\fR).
+
+This command should be a program or script which takes
+a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue,
+such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.
+
+This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups,
+but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95
+and NT.
+
+If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name
+is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the
+command.
-.B samba@listproc.anu.edu.au
+Note that it is good practice to include the absolute
+path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the
+server.
+Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting\fB\fR
+
+Example: \fBqueuepause command = enable %p
+\fR.TP
+\fBread bmpx (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8)will support the "Read
+Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used and defaults to
+no. You should never need to set this
+parameter.
+
+Default: \fBread bmpx = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBread list (S)\fR
+This is a list of users that are given read-only
+access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then
+they will not be given write access, no matter what the \fIwriteable\fR
+option is set to. The list can include group names using the
+syntax described in the \fI invalid users\fR parameter.
+
+See also the \fI write list\fR parameter and the \fIinvalid users\fR
+parameter.
+
+Default: \fBread list = <empty string>\fR
+
+Example: \fBread list = mary, @students\fR
+.TP
+\fBread only (S)\fR
+Note that this is an inverted synonym for \fIwriteable\fR.
+.TP
+\fBread raw (G)\fR
+This parameter controls whether or not the server
+will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data
+to clients.
+
+If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in
+one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit.
+
+However, some clients either negotiate the allowable
+block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block
+sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.
+
+In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning
+tool and left severely alone. See also \fIwrite raw\fR.
+
+Default: \fBread raw = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBread size (G)\fR
+The option \fIread size\fR
+affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes.
+If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB
+commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger
+than this value then the server begins writing the data before it
+has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of
+SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data
+has been read from disk.
+
+This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and
+network access are similar, having very little effect when the
+speed of one is much greater than the other.
+
+The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation
+has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely
+that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway.
+A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate
+memory unnecessarily.
+
+Default: \fBread size = 16384\fR
+
+Example: \fBread size = 8192\fR
+.TP
+\fBremote announce (G)\fR
+This option allows you to setup nmbd(8)to periodically announce itself
+to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.
+
+This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear
+in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation
+rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you
+can send IP packets to.
+
+For example:
+
+\fBremote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS
+192.168.4.255/STAFF\fR
+
+the above line would cause \fBnmbd\fR to announce itself
+to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names.
+If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in
+the \fIworkgroup\fR
+parameter is used instead.
+
+The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast
+addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses
+of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.
+
+See the documentation file \fIBROWSING.txt\fR
+in the \fIdocs/\fR directory.
+
+Default: \fBremote announce = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBremote browse sync (G)\fR
+This option allows you to setup nmbd(8)to periodically request
+synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba
+server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to
+gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This
+is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers.
+
+This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local
+clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse
+propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere
+that you can send IP packets to.
+
+For example:
+
+\fBremote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255
+\fR
+the above line would cause \fBnmbd\fR to request
+the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to
+synchronize their browse lists with the local server.
+
+The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast
+addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses
+of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If
+a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate
+that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it
+is in fact the browse master on its segment.
+
+Default: \fBremote browse sync = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBrestrict anonymous (G)\fR
+This is a boolean parameter. If it is true, then
+anonymous access to the server will be restricted, namely in the
+case where the server is expecting the client to send a username,
+but it doesn't. Setting it to true will force these anonymous
+connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always
+supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter
+is only recommended for homogeneous NT client environments.
+
+This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely
+on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistent. NT 4.0
+likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list,
+and this is a way to work around that.
+
+When restrict anonymous is true, all anonymous connections
+are denied no matter what they are for. This can effect the ability
+of a machine to access the Samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate
+its machine account after someone else has logged on the client
+interactively. The NT client will display a message saying that
+the machine's account in the domain doesn't exist or the password is
+bad. The best way to deal with this is to reboot NT client machines
+between interactive logons, using "Shutdown and Restart", rather
+than "Close all programs and logon as a different user".
+
+Default: \fBrestrict anonymous = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBroot (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR.
+.TP
+\fBroot dir (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR.
+.TP
+\fBroot directory (G)\fR
+The server will \fBchroot()\fR (i.e.
+Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is
+not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the
+server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries.
+It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other
+parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names
+to access other directories (depending on the setting of the \fIwide links\fR
+parameter).
+
+Adding a \fIroot directory\fR entry other
+than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It
+absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the
+sub-tree specified in the \fIroot directory\fR
+option, \fBincluding\fR some files needed for
+complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability
+of the server you will need to mirror some system files
+into the \fIroot directory\fR tree. In particular
+you will need to mirror \fI/etc/passwd\fR (or a
+subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for
+printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is
+operating system dependent.
+
+Default: \fBroot directory = /\fR
+
+Example: \fBroot directory = /homes/smb\fR
+.TP
+\fBroot postexec (S)\fR
+This is the same as the \fIpostexec\fR
+parameter except that the command is run as root. This
+is useful for unmounting filesystems
+(such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed.
+
+See also \fI postexec\fR.
+
+Default: \fBroot postexec = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBroot preexec (S)\fR
+This is the same as the \fIpreexec\fR
+parameter except that the command is run as root. This
+is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a
+connection is opened.
+
+See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR.
+
+Default: \fBroot preexec = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBroot preexec close (S)\fR
+This is the same as the \fIpreexec close
+\fRparameter except that the command is run as root.
+
+See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR.
+
+Default: \fBroot preexec close = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBsecurity (G)\fR
+This option affects how clients respond to
+Samba and is one of the most important settings in the \fI smb.conf\fR file.
+
+The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to
+protocol negotiations with smbd(8)
+to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide
+based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password
+information to the server.
+
+The default is \fBsecurity = user\fR, as this is
+the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and
+Windows NT.
+
+The alternatives are \fBsecurity = share\fR,
+\fBsecurity = server\fR or \fBsecurity = domain
+\fR\&.
+
+In versions of Samba prior to 2.0.0, the default was
+\fBsecurity = share\fR mainly because that was
+the only option at one stage.
+
+There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this
+setting. When in user or server level security a WfWg client
+will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect
+drive" dialog box. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible)
+to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that
+you are logged into WfWg as.
+
+If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their
+usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use
+\fBsecurity = user\fR. If you mostly use usernames
+that don't exist on the UNIX box then use \fBsecurity =
+share\fR.
+
+You should also use \fBsecurity = share\fR if you
+want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This
+is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult
+to setup guest shares with \fBsecurity = user\fR, see
+the \fImap to guest\fR
+parameter for details.
+
+It is possible to use \fBsmbd\fR in a \fB hybrid mode\fR where it is offers both user and share
+level security under different \fINetBIOS aliases\fR.
+
+The different settings will now be explained.
+
+\fBSECURITY = SHARE
+\fR
+When clients connect to a share level security server they
+need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before
+attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients
+such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with
+a username but no password when talking to a \fBsecurity = share
+\fRserver). Instead, the clients send authentication information
+(passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect
+to that share.
+
+Note that \fBsmbd\fR \fBALWAYS\fR
+uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in
+\fBsecurity = share\fR level security.
+
+As clients are not required to send a username to the server
+in share level security, \fBsmbd\fR uses several
+techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf
+of the client.
+
+A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given
+client password is constructed using the following methods :
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+If the \fIguest
+only\fR parameter is set, then all the other
+stages are missed and only the \fIguest account\fR username is checked.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+Is a username is sent with the share connection
+request, then this username (after mapping - see \fIusername map\fR),
+is added as a potential username.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+If the client did a previous \fBlogon
+\fRrequest (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the
+username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The name of the service the client requested is
+added as a potential username.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The NetBIOS name of the client is added to
+the list as a potential username.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+Any users on the \fI user\fR list are added as potential usernames.
.RE
-You may also like to subscribe to the announcement channel
+.PP
+If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is
+not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password.
+The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the
+UNIX user.
+.PP
+.PP
+If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is
+set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked
+as available to the \fIguest account\fR, then this
+guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.
+.PP
+.PP
+Note that it can be \fBvery\fR confusing
+in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually
+be used in granting access.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBSECURITY = USER
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2.
+With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a
+valid username and password (which can be mapped using the \fIusername map\fR
+parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter) can also
+be used in this security mode. Parameters such as \fIuser\fR and \fIguest only\fR if set are then applied and
+may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after
+the user has been successfully authenticated.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being
+requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after
+the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
+guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
+the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR.
+See the \fImap to guest\fR
+parameter for details on doing this.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBSECURITY = SERVER
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password
+by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this
+fails it will revert to \fBsecurity = user\fR, but note
+that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot
+revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid
+\fIsmbpasswd\fR file to check users against. See the
+documentation file in the \fIdocs/\fR directory
+\fIENCRYPTION.txt\fR for details on how to set this
+up.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBNote\fR that from the client's point of
+view \fBsecurity = server\fR is the same as \fB security = user\fR. It only affects how the server deals
+with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the
+client sees.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being
+requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after
+the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
+guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
+the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR.
+See the \fImap to guest\fR
+parameter for details on doing this.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also the \fIpassword
+server\fR parameter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR
+parameter.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBSECURITY = DOMAIN
+\fR.PP
+.PP
+This mode will only work correctly if smbpasswd(8)has been used to add this
+machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the \fIencrypted passwords\fR
+parameter to be set to true. In this
+mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing
+it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly
+the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBNote\fR that a valid UNIX user must still
+exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow
+Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBNote\fR that from the client's point
+of view \fBsecurity = domain\fR is the same as \fBsecurity = user
+\fR\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication,
+it does not in any way affect what the client sees.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being
+requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after
+the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
+guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
+the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR.
+See the \fImap to guest\fR
+parameter for details on doing this.
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBBUG:\fR There is currently a bug in the
+implementation of \fBsecurity = domain\fR with respect
+to multi-byte character set usernames. The communication with a
+Domain Controller must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently
+does not widen multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus
+a multi-byte username will not be recognized correctly at the
+Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION.
+.PP
+.PP
+See also the \fIpassword
+server\fR parameter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR
+parameter.
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBsecurity = USER\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBsecurity = DOMAIN\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBsecurity mask (S)\fR
+This parameter controls what UNIX permission
+bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating
+the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security
+dialog box.
+
+This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to
+the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in
+this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this
+mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed
+to change.
+
+If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing
+a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file.
+
+\fBNote\fR that users who can access the
+Samba server through other means can easily bypass this
+restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone
+"appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will
+probably want to leave it set to 0777.
+
+See also the \fIforce directory security mode\fR,
+\fIdirectory
+security mask\fR, \fIforce security mode\fR parameters.
+
+Default: \fBsecurity mask = 0777\fR
+
+Example: \fBsecurity mask = 0770\fR
+.TP
+\fBserver string (G)\fR
+This controls what string will show up in the
+printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection
+in \fBnet view\fR. It can be any string that you wish
+to show to your users.
+
+It also sets what will appear in browse lists next
+to the machine name.
+
+A \fI%v\fR will be replaced with the Samba
+version number.
+
+A \fI%h\fR will be replaced with the
+hostname.
+
+Default: \fBserver string = Samba %v\fR
+
+Example: \fBserver string = University of GNUs Samba
+Server\fR
+.TP
+\fBset directory (S)\fR
+If \fBset directory = no\fR, then
+users of the service may not use the setdir command to change
+directory.
+
+The \fBsetdir\fR command is only implemented
+in the Digital Pathworks client. See the Pathworks documentation
+for details.
+
+Default: \fBset directory = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBshort preserve case (S)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls if new files
+which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of
+suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced
+to be the \fIdefault case
+\fR\&. This option can be use with \fBpreserve case = yes\fR
+to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short
+names are lowered.
+
+See the section on NAME MANGLING.
+
+Default: \fBshort preserve case = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBshow add printer wizard (G)\fR
+With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support
+for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will
+appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will
+contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is
+possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege
+of the connected user.
+
+Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will
+open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for
+Administrator privileges. If the user does not have administrative
+access on the print server (i.e is not root or a member of the
+\fIprinter admin\fR group), the OpenPrinterEx()
+call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for
+a lower privilege level. This should succeed, however the APW
+icon will not be displayed.
+
+Disabling the \fIshow add printer wizard\fR
+parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server
+to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. \fB Note :\fRThis does not prevent the same user from having
+administrative privilege on an individual printer.
+
+See also \fIaddprinter
+command\fR, \fIdeleteprinter command\fR, \fIprinter admin\fR
+
+Default :\fBshow add printer wizard = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBshutdown script (G)\fR
+\fBThis parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch\fR
+This a full path name to a script called by
+\fBsmbd(8)\fRthat
+should start a shutdown procedure.
+
+This command will be run as the user connected to the
+server.
-.RS 3
-samba-announce@listproc.anu.edu.au
+%m %t %r %f parameters are expanded
+
+\fI%m\fR will be substituted with the
+shutdown message sent to the server.
+
+\fI%t\fR will be substituted with the
+number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the
+shutdown procedure.
+
+\fI%r\fR will be substituted with the
+switch \fB-r\fR. It means reboot after shutdown
+for NT.
+
+\fI%f\fR will be substituted with the
+switch \fB-f\fR. It means force the shutdown
+even if applications do not respond for NT.
+
+Default: \fBNone\fR.
+
+Example: \fBabort shutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f\fR
+
+Shutdown script example:
+.sp
+.nf
+ #!/bin/bash
+
+ $time=0
+ let "time/60"
+ let "time++"
+
+ /sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 &
+
+.sp
+.fi
+Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background.
+
+See also \fIabort shutdown script\fR.
+.TP
+\fBsmb passwd file (G)\fR
+This option sets the path to the encrypted
+smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file
+is compiled into Samba.
+
+Default: \fBsmb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd
+\fR
+Example: \fBsmb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
+\fR.TP
+\fBsocket address (G)\fR
+This option allows you to control what
+address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to
+support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each
+with a different configuration.
+
+By default Samba will accept connections on any
+address.
+
+Example: \fBsocket address = 192.168.2.20\fR
+.TP
+\fBsocket options (G)\fR
+This option allows you to set socket options
+to be used when talking with the client.
+
+Socket options are controls on the networking layer
+of the operating systems which allow the connection to be
+tuned.
+
+This option will typically be used to tune your Samba
+server for optimal performance for your local network. There is
+no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for
+your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself. We
+strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your
+operating system first (perhaps \fBman setsockopt\fR
+will help).
+
+You may find that on some systems Samba will say
+"Unknown socket option" when you supply an option. This means you
+either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file
+to includes.h for your OS. If the latter is the case please
+send the patch to samba@samba.org <URL:mailto:samba@samba.org>.
+
+Any of the supported socket options may be combined
+in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.
+
+This is the list of socket options currently settable
+using this option:
+.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_KEEPALIVE
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_REUSEADDR
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_BROADCAST
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+TCP_NODELAY
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+IPTOS_LOWDELAY
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_SNDBUF *
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_RCVBUF *
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_SNDLOWAT *
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+SO_RCVLOWAT *
.RE
-
-To subscribe to these lists send a message to
-listproc@listproc.anu.edu.au with a body of "subscribe samba Your
-Name" or "subscribe samba-announce Your Name".
-
-Errors or suggestions for improvements to the Samba man pages should be
-mailed to:
-
-.RS 3
-.B samba-bugs@anu.edu.au (Andrew Tridgell)
+.PP
+Those marked with a \fB'*'\fR take an integer
+argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable
+or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you
+don't specify 1 or 0.
+.PP
+.PP
+To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE
+for example \fBSO_SNDBUF = 8192\fR. Note that you must
+not have any spaces before or after the = sign.
+.PP
+.PP
+If you are on a local network then a sensible option
+might be
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+If you have a local network then you could try:
+.PP
+.PP
+\fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try
+setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT.
+.PP
+.PP
+Note that several of the options may cause your Samba
+server to fail completely. Use these options with caution!
+.PP
+.PP
+Default: \fBsocket options = TCP_NODELAY\fR
+.PP
+.PP
+Example: \fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\fR
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBsource environment (G)\fR
+This parameter causes Samba to set environment
+variables as per the content of the file named.
+
+If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character
+then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and
+will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe.
+
+The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should
+be formatted as the output of the standard Unix \fBenv(1)
+\fRcommand. This is of the form :
+
+Example environment entry:
+
+\fBSAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME = myhostname\fR
+
+Default: \fBNo default value\fR
+
+Examples: \fBsource environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh
+\fR
+Example: \fBsource environment =
+/usr/local/smb_env_vars\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If
+it is set to no, the SSL-enabled Samba behaves
+exactly like the non-SSL Samba. If set to yes,
+it depends on the variables \fI ssl hosts\fR and \fIssl hosts resign\fR whether an SSL
+connection will be required.
+
+Default: \fBssl = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl CA certDir (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This variable defines where to look up the Certification
+Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for
+each CA that Samba will trust. The file name must be the hash
+value over the "Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory
+is set up is explained later in this document. All files within the
+directory that don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You
+don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.
+
+Default: \fBssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs
+\fR.TP
+\fBssl CA certFile (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs.
+The certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big
+file and this variable points to the file. You will probably
+only use one of the two ways to define your CAs. The first choice is
+preferable if you have many CAs or want to be flexible, the second
+is preferable if you only have one CA and want to keep things
+simple (you won't need to create the hashed file names). You
+don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.
+
+Default: \fBssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem
+\fR.TP
+\fBssl ciphers (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered
+during SSL negotiation. You should not set this variable unless
+you know what you are doing.
+.TP
+\fBssl client cert (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+The certificate in this file is used by \fBsmbclient(1)\fRif it exists. It's needed
+if the server requires a client certificate.
+
+Default: \fBssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem
+\fR.TP
+\fBssl client key (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This is the private key for \fBsmbclient(1)\fR. It's only needed if the
+client should have a certificate.
+
+Default: \fBssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem
+\fR.TP
+\fBssl compatibility (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This variable defines whether OpenSSL should be configured
+for bug compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is
+probably not desirable because currently no clients with SSL
+implementations other than OpenSSL exist.
+
+Default: \fBssl compatibility = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl egd socket (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This option is used to define the location of the communiation socket of
+an EGD or PRNGD daemon, from which entropy can be retrieved. This option
+can be used instead of or together with the \fIssl entropy file\fR
+directive. 255 bytes of entropy will be retrieved from the daemon.
+
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl entropy bytes (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This parameter is used to define the number of bytes which should
+be read from the \fIssl entropy
+file\fR If a -1 is specified, the entire file will
+be read.
+
+Default: \fBssl entropy bytes = 255\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl entropy file (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This parameter is used to specify a file from which processes will
+read "random bytes" on startup. In order to seed the internal pseudo
+random number generator, entropy must be provided. On system with a
+\fI/dev/urandom\fR device file, the processes
+will retrieve its entropy from the kernel. On systems without kernel
+entropy support, a file can be supplied that will be read on startup
+and that will be used to seed the PRNG.
+
+Default: \fBnone\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl hosts (G)\fR
+See \fI ssl hosts resign\fR.
+.TP
+\fBssl hosts resign (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+These two variables define whether Samba will go
+into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, Samba will
+allow only SSL connections. If the \fIssl hosts\fR variable lists
+hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name),
+only these hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the \fI ssl hosts resign\fR variable lists hosts, only these
+hosts will \fBNOT\fR be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two
+variables is the same as for the \fI hosts allow\fR and \fIhosts deny\fR pair of variables, only
+that the subject of the decision is different: It's not the access
+right but whether SSL is used or not.
+
+The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts
+outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*).
+
+Default: \fBssl hosts = <empty string>\fR
+
+\fBssl hosts resign = <empty string>\fR
+
+Example: \fBssl hosts resign = 192.168.\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl require clientcert (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+If this variable is set to yes, the
+server will not tolerate connections from clients that don't
+have a valid certificate. The directory/file given in \fIssl CA certDir\fR
+and \fIssl CA certFile
+\fRwill be used to look up the CAs that issued
+the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be verified
+positively, the connection will be terminated. If this variable
+is set to no, clients don't need certificates.
+Contrary to web applications you really \fBshould\fR
+require client certificates. In the web environment the client's
+data is sensitive (credit card numbers) and the server must prove
+to be trustworthy. In a file server environment the server's data
+will be sensitive and the clients must prove to be trustworthy.
+
+Default: \fBssl require clientcert = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl require servercert (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+If this variable is set to yes, the
+\fBsmbclient(1)\fR
+will request a certificate from the server. Same as
+\fIssl require
+clientcert\fR for the server.
+
+Default: \fBssl require servercert = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBssl server cert (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This is the file containing the server's certificate.
+The server \fBmust\fR have a certificate. The
+file may also contain the server's private key. See later for
+how certificates and private keys are created.
+
+Default: \fBssl server cert = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBssl server key (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This file contains the private key of the server. If
+this variable is not defined, the key is looked up in the
+certificate file (it may be appended to the certificate).
+The server \fBmust\fR have a private key
+and the certificate \fBmust\fR
+match this private key.
+
+Default: \fBssl server key = <empty string>
+\fR.TP
+\fBssl version (G)\fR
+This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
+is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
+system and the configure option \fB--with-ssl\fR was
+given at configure time.
+
+This enumeration variable defines the versions of the
+SSL protocol that will be used. ssl2or3 allows
+dynamic negotiation of SSL v2 or v3, ssl2 results
+in SSL v2, ssl3 results in SSL v3 and
+tls1 results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer
+Security) is the new standard for SSL.
+
+Default: \fBssl version = "ssl2or3"\fR
+.TP
+\fBstat cache (G)\fR
+This parameter determines if smbd(8)will use a cache in order to
+speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need
+to change this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBstat cache = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBstat cache size (G)\fR
+This parameter determines the number of
+entries in the \fIstat cache\fR. You should
+never need to change this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBstat cache size = 50\fR
+.TP
+\fBstatus (G)\fR
+This enables or disables logging of connections
+to a status file that smbstatus(1)
+can read.
+
+With this disabled \fBsmbstatus\fR won't be able
+to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to
+change this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBstatus = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBstrict allocate (S)\fR
+This is a boolean that controls the handling of
+disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to yes
+the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real
+disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour
+of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks
+when a file is created or extended to be a given size. In UNIX
+terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files.
+This can be slow on some systems.
+
+When strict allocate is no the server does sparse
+disk block allocation when a file is extended.
+
+Setting this to yes can help Samba return
+out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota
+of users.
+
+Default: \fBstrict allocate = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBstrict locking (S)\fR
+This is a boolean that controls the handling of
+file locking in the server. When this is set to yes
+the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and
+deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.
+
+When strict locking is no the server does file
+lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.
+
+Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it
+is important, so in the vast majority of cases \fBstrict
+locking = no\fR is preferable.
+
+Default: \fBstrict locking = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBstrict sync (S)\fR
+Many Windows applications (including the Windows
+98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to
+disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces
+the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that
+all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored
+onto stable storage. This is very slow and should only be done
+rarely. Setting this parameter to no (the
+default) means that smbdignores the Windows applications requests for
+a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the
+operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is
+little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many
+performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98
+explorer shell file copies.
+
+See also the \fIsync
+always>\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBstrict sync = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBstrip dot (G)\fR
+This is a boolean that controls whether to
+strip trailing dots off UNIX filenames. This helps with some
+CDROMs that have filenames ending in a single dot.
+
+Default: \fBstrip dot = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBsync always (S)\fR
+This is a boolean parameter that controls
+whether writes will always be written to stable storage before
+the write call returns. If this is false then the server will be
+guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can
+set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous).
+If this is true then every write will be followed by a \fBfsync()
+\fRcall to ensure the data is written to disk. Note that
+the \fIstrict sync\fR parameter must be set to
+yes in order for this parameter to have
+any affect.
+
+See also the \fIstrict
+sync\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fBsync always = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBsyslog (G)\fR
+This parameter maps how Samba debug messages
+are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug
+level zero maps onto syslog LOG_ERR, debug
+level one maps onto LOG_WARNING, debug level
+two maps onto LOG_NOTICE, debug level three
+maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to LOG_DEBUG.
+
+This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages
+to syslog. Only messages with debug level less than this value
+will be sent to syslog.
+
+Default: \fBsyslog = 1\fR
+.TP
+\fBsyslog only (G)\fR
+If this parameter is set then Samba debug
+messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to
+the debug log files.
+
+Default: \fBsyslog only = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBtemplate homedir (G)\fR
+When filling out the user information for a Windows NT
+user, the winbindd(8)daemon
+uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user.
+If the string \fI%D\fR is present it is substituted
+with the user's Windows NT domain name. If the string \fI%U
+\fRis present it is substituted with the user's Windows
+NT user name.
+
+Default: \fBtemplate homedir = /home/%D/%U\fR
+.TP
+\fBtemplate shell (G)\fR
+When filling out the user information for a Windows NT
+user, the winbindd(8)daemon
+uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.
+
+Default: \fBtemplate shell = /bin/false\fR
+.TP
+\fBtime offset (G)\fR
+This parameter is a setting in minutes to add
+to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if
+you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight
+saving time handling.
+
+Default: \fBtime offset = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBtime offset = 60\fR
+.TP
+\fBtime server (G)\fR
+This parameter determines if
+nmbd(8)advertises itself as a time server to Windows
+clients.
+
+Default: \fBtime server = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBtimestamp logs (G)\fR
+Synonym for \fI debug timestamp\fR.
+.TP
+\fBtotal print jobs (G)\fR
+This parameter accepts an integer value which defines
+a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted
+system wide at any given time. If a print job is submitted
+by a client which will exceed this number, then smbdwill return an
+error indicating that no space is available on the server. The
+default value of 0 means that no such limit exists. This parameter
+can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is
+designed as a printing throttle. See also
+\fImax print jobs\fR.
+
+Default: \fBtotal print jobs = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBtotal print jobs = 5000\fR
+.TP
+\fBunix extensions(G)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls whether Samba
+implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These
+extensions enable CIFS to server UNIX clients to UNIX servers
+better, and allow such things as symbolic links, hard links etc.
+These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of
+no current use to Windows clients.
+
+Default: \fBunix extensions = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBunix password sync (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter controls whether Samba
+attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password
+when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed.
+If this is set to true the program specified in the \fIpasswd
+program\fRparameter is called \fBAS ROOT\fR -
+to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the
+old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no
+access to the old password cleartext, only the new).
+
+See also \fIpasswd
+program\fR, \fI passwd chat\fR.
+
+Default: \fBunix password sync = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBupdate encrypted (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter allows a user logging
+on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed)
+password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as
+they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext
+password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext
+password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account
+database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB
+challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing
+all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the
+change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over
+to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users
+have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd
+file this parameter should be set to no.
+
+In order for this parameter to work correctly the \fIencrypt passwords\fR
+parameter must be set to no when
+this parameter is set to yes.
+
+Note that even when this parameter is set a user
+authenticating to \fBsmbd\fR must still enter a valid
+password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed
+(smbpasswd) passwords.
+
+Default: \fBupdate encrypted = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBuse client driver (S)\fR
+This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000
+clients. It has no affect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When
+serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing
+a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required
+to install a local printer driver. From this point on, the client
+will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer
+connection. This is much the same behavior that will occur
+when \fBdisable spoolss = yes\fR.
+
+The differentiating
+factor is that under normal circumstances, the NT/2000 client will
+attempt to open the network printer using MS-RPC. The problem is that
+because the client considers the printer to be local, it will attempt
+to issue the OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated
+with the logged on user. If the user possesses local administator rights
+but not root privilegde on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx()
+call will fail. The result is that the client will now display an "Access
+Denied; Unable to connect" message in the printer queue window (even though
+jobs may successfully be printed).
+
+If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt
+to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped
+to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead. Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx()
+call to succeed. \fBThis parameter MUST not be able enabled
+on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba
+server.\fR
+
+See also disable spoolss
+
+Default: \fBuse client driver = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBuse mmap (G)\fR
+This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can
+depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent
+mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a
+coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to false by
+default on HPUX. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone. This
+parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with
+the tdb internal code.
+
+Default: \fBuse mmap = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBuse rhosts (G)\fR
+If this global parameter is true, it specifies
+that the UNIX user's \fI.rhosts\fR file in their home directory
+will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed
+access without specifying a password.
+
+\fBNOTE:\fR The use of \fIuse rhosts
+\fRcan be a major security hole. This is because you are
+trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to
+get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the \fI use rhosts\fR option be only used if you really know what
+you are doing.
+
+Default: \fBuse rhosts = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBuser (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fI username\fR.
+.TP
+\fBusers (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fI username\fR.
+.TP
+\fBusername (S)\fR
+Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited
+list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against
+each username in turn (left to right).
+
+The \fIusername\fR line is needed only when
+the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case
+for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg
+usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be
+better using the \\\\server\\share%user syntax instead.
+
+The \fIusername\fR line is not a great
+solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate
+the supplied password against each of the usernames in the
+\fIusername\fR line in turn. This is slow and
+a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords.
+You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter
+unwisely.
+
+Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This
+parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints
+to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the
+supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and
+they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a
+telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as,
+so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.
+
+To restrict a service to a particular set of users you
+can use the \fIvalid users
+\fRparameter.
+
+If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name
+will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba
+is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in
+the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users
+in the group of that name.
+
+If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name
+will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will
+expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.
+
+If any of the usernames begin with a '&'then the name
+will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba
+is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list
+of all users in the netgroup group of that name.
+
+Note that searching though a groups database can take
+quite some time, and some clients may time out during the
+search.
+
+See the section NOTE ABOUT
+USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how
+this parameter determines access to the services.
+
+Default: \fBThe guest account if a guest service,
+else <empty string>.\fR
+
+Examples:\fBusername = fred, mary, jack, jane,
+@users, @pcgroup\fR
+.TP
+\fBusername level (G)\fR
+This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at
+the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase
+username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the
+username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the
+username is not found on the UNIX machine.
+
+If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes.
+This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
+combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
+higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower
+the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have
+strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as AstrangeUser
+\&.
+
+Default: \fBusername level = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBusername level = 5\fR
+.TP
+\fBusername map (G)\fR
+This option allows you to specify a file containing
+a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be
+used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames
+that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX
+box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username
+so that they can more easily share files.
+
+The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should
+contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed
+by a list of usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the
+right may contain names of the form @group in which case they
+will match any UNIX username in that group. The special client
+name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the
+map file may be up to 1023 characters long.
+
+The file is processed on each line by taking the
+supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right
+hand side of the '=' signs. If the supplied name matches any of
+the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name
+on the left. Processing then continues with the next line.
+
+If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is
+ignored
+
+If any line begins with an '!' then the processing
+will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line.
+Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed.
+Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line
+later in the file.
+
+For example to map from the name admin
+or administrator to the UNIX name root you would use:
+
+\fBroot = admin administrator\fR
+
+Or to map anyone in the UNIX group system
+to the UNIX name sys you would use:
+
+\fBsys = @system\fR
+
+You can have as many mappings as you like in a username
+map file.
+
+If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then
+the netgroup database is checked before the \fI/etc/group
+\fRdatabase for matching groups.
+
+You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them
+by using double quotes around the name. For example:
+
+\fBtridge = "Andrew Tridgell"\fR
+
+would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the
+unix username "tridge".
+
+The following example would map mary and fred to the
+unix user sys, and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the
+\&'!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on
+that line.
+
+.sp
+.nf
+ !sys = mary fred
+ guest = *
+
+.sp
+.fi
+
+Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences
+of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\\\server\\fred and fred is remapped to mary then you
+will actually be connecting to \\\\server\\mary and will need to
+supply a password suitable for mary not
+fred. The only exception to this is the
+username passed to the \fI password server\fR (if you have one). The password
+server will receive whatever username the client supplies without
+modification.
+
+Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect
+this has is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have
+trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think
+they don't own the print job.
+
+Default: \fBno username map\fR
+
+Example: \fBusername map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map
+\fR.TP
+\fButmp (G)\fR
+This boolean parameter is only available if
+Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR. If set to true then Samba will attempt
+to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a
+connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the
+user connecting to a Samba share.
+
+See also the \fI utmp directory\fR parameter.
+
+Default: \fButmp = no\fR
+.TP
+\fButmp directory(G)\fR
+This parameter is only available if Samba has
+been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR. It specifies a directory pathname that is
+used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that
+record user connections to a Samba server. See also the \fIutmp\fR parameter. By default this is
+not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the
+native system is set to use (usually
+\fI/var/run/utmp\fR on Linux).
+
+Default: \fBno utmp directory\fR
+.TP
+\fBvalid users (S)\fR
+This is a list of users that should be allowed
+to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&'
+are interpreted using the same rules as described in the
+\fIinvalid users\fR parameter.
+
+If this is empty (the default) then any user can login.
+If a username is in both this list and the \fIinvalid
+users\fR list then access is denied for that user.
+
+The current servicename is substituted for \fI%S
+\fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section.
+
+See also \fIinvalid users
+\fR
+Default: \fBNo valid users list (anyone can login)
+\fR
+Example: \fBvalid users = greg, @pcusers\fR
+.TP
+\fBveto files(S)\fR
+This is a list of files and directories that
+are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must
+be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included
+in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files
+or directories as in DOS wildcards.
+
+Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and
+must \fBnot\fR include the unix directory
+separator '/'.
+
+Note that the \fIcase sensitive\fR option
+is applicable in vetoing files.
+
+One feature of the veto files parameter that it
+is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when
+trying to delete a directory. If a directory that is
+to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this
+deletion will \fBfail\fR unless you also set
+the \fIdelete veto files\fR parameter to
+\fIyes\fR.
+
+Setting this parameter will affect the performance
+of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories
+for a match as they are scanned.
+
+See also \fIhide files
+\fRand \fI case sensitive\fR.
+
+Default: \fBNo files or directories are vetoed.
+\fR
+Examples:
+.sp
+.nf
+; Veto any files containing the word Security,
+; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
+; word root.
+veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/
+
+; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
+; creates.
+veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
+.sp
+.fi
+.TP
+\fBveto oplock files (S)\fR
+This parameter is only valid when the \fIoplocks\fR
+parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator
+to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that
+match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the
+\fIveto files\fR
+parameter.
+
+Default: \fBNo files are vetoed for oplock
+grants\fR
+
+You might want to do this on files that you know will
+be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this
+is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy
+client contention for files ending in \fI.SEM\fR.
+To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use
+the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for
+the particular NetBench share :
+
+Example: \fBveto oplock files = /*.SEM/
+\fR.TP
+\fBvfs object (S)\fR
+This parameter specifies a shared object file that
+is used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal
+disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded
+with a VFS object. The Samba VFS layer is new to Samba 2.2 and
+must be enabled at compile time with --with-vfs.
+
+Default : \fBno value\fR
+.TP
+\fBvfs options (S)\fR
+This parameter allows parameters to be passed
+to the vfs layer at initialization time. The Samba VFS layer
+is new to Samba 2.2 and must be enabled at compile time
+with --with-vfs. See also \fI vfs object\fR.
+
+Default : \fBno value\fR
+.TP
+\fBvolume (S)\fR
+This allows you to override the volume label
+returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs
+that insist on a particular volume label.
+
+Default: \fBthe name of the share\fR
+.TP
+\fBwide links (S)\fR
+This parameter controls whether or not links
+in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links
+that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the
+server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only
+to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.
+
+Note that setting this parameter can have a negative
+effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls
+that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.
+
+Default: \fBwide links = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind cache time\fR
+This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
+winbindd(8)daemon will cache
+user and group information before querying a Windows NT server
+again.
+
+Default: \fBwinbind cache type = 15\fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind enum users\fR
+On large installations using
+winbindd(8)it may be
+necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the
+\fBsetpwent()\fR,
+\fBgetpwent()\fR and
+\fBendpwent()\fR group of system calls. If
+the \fIwinbind enum users\fR parameter is
+false, calls to the \fBgetpwent\fR system call
+will not return any data.
+
+\fBWarning:\fR Turning off user
+enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. For
+example, the finger program relies on having access to the
+full user list when searching for matching
+usernames.
+
+Default: \fBwinbind enum users = yes \fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind enum groups\fR
+On large installations using
+winbindd(8)it may be
+necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the
+\fBsetgrent()\fR,
+\fBgetgrent()\fR and
+\fBendgrent()\fR group of system calls. If
+the \fIwinbind enum groups\fR parameter is
+false, calls to the \fBgetgrent()\fR system
+call will not return any data.
+
+\fBWarning:\fR Turning off group
+enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.
+
+Default: \fBwinbind enum groups = yes \fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind gid\fR
+The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
+ids that are allocated by the winbindd(8)daemon. This range of group ids should have no
+existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can
+occur otherwise.
+
+Default: \fBwinbind gid = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBwinbind gid = 10000-20000\fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind separator\fR
+This parameter allows an admin to define the character
+used when listing a username of the form of \fIDOMAIN
+\fR\\\fIuser\fR. This parameter
+is only applicable when using the \fIpam_winbind.so\fR
+and \fInss_winbind.so\fR modules for UNIX services.
+
+Example: \fBwinbind separator = \\\fR
+
+Example: \fBwinbind separator = +\fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind uid\fR
+The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
+ids that are allocated by the winbindd(8)daemon. This range of ids should have no
+existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can
+occur otherwise.
+
+Default: \fBwinbind uid = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBwinbind uid = 10000-20000\fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind use default domain\fR
+.TP
+\fBwinbind use default domain\fR
+This parameter specifies whether the winbindd(8)
+daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username.
+Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's
+own domain. While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e-mail
+function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system.
+
+Default: \fBwinbind use default domain = <falseg>
+\fR
+Example: \fBwinbind use default domain = true\fR
+.TP
+\fBwins hook (G)\fR
+When Samba is running as a WINS server this
+allows you to call an external program for all changes to the
+WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the
+dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as
+dynamic DNS.
+
+The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script
+or executable that will be called as follows:
+
+\fBwins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list
+\fR.RS
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The first argument is the operation and is one
+of "add", "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can
+be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient
+information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the
+name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated
+as an add.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the
+name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called.
+Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores
+and periods.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The third argument is the NetBIOS name
+type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live)
+for the name in seconds.
+.TP 0.2i
+\(bu
+The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP
+addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is
+empty then the name should be deleted.
.RE
-
+.PP
+An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update
+program \fBnsupdate\fR is provided in the examples
+directory of the Samba source code.
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBwins proxy (G)\fR
+This is a boolean that controls if nmbd(8)will respond to broadcast name
+queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this
+to yes for some older clients.
+
+Default: \fBwins proxy = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBwins server (G)\fR
+This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP
+address for preference) of the WINS server that nmbd(8)should register with. If you have a WINS server on
+your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.
+
+You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
+multi-subnetted network.
+
+\fBNOTE\fR. You need to set up Samba to point
+to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet
+browsing to work correctly.
+
+See the documentation file \fIBROWSING.txt\fR
+in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.
+
+Default: \fBnot enabled\fR
+
+Example: \fBwins server = 192.9.200.1\fR
+.TP
+\fBwins support (G)\fR
+This boolean controls if the
+nmbd(8)process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should
+not set this to true unless you have a multi-subnetted network and
+you wish a particular \fBnmbd\fR to be your WINS server.
+Note that you should \fBNEVER\fR set this to true
+on more than one machine in your network.
+
+Default: \fBwins support = no\fR
+.TP
+\fBworkgroup (G)\fR
+This controls what workgroup your server will
+appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter
+also controls the Domain name used with the \fBsecurity = domain\fR
+setting.
+
+Default: \fBset at compile time to WORKGROUP\fR
+
+Example: \fBworkgroup = MYGROUP\fR
+.TP
+\fBwritable (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fI writeable\fR for people who can't spell :-).
+.TP
+\fBwrite cache size (S)\fR
+If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
+Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file
+(it does \fBnot\fR do this for
+non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request
+to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible.
+The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset
+would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client.
+Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored
+within it.
+
+This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more
+efficient write size for RAID disks (i.e. writes may be tuned to
+be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems
+where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free
+memory for userspace programs.
+
+The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache
+(per oplocked file) in bytes.
+
+Default: \fBwrite cache size = 0\fR
+
+Example: \fBwrite cache size = 262144\fR
+
+for a 256k cache size per file.
+.TP
+\fBwrite list (S)\fR
+This is a list of users that are given read-write
+access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then
+they will be given write access, no matter what the \fIwriteable\fR
+option is set to. The list can include group names using the
+@group syntax.
+
+Note that if a user is in both the read list and the
+write list then they will be given write access.
+
+See also the \fIread list
+\fRoption.
+
+Default: \fBwrite list = <empty string>
+\fR
+Example: \fBwrite list = admin, root, @staff
+\fR.TP
+\fBwrite ok (S)\fR
+Synonym for \fI writeable\fR.
+.TP
+\fBwrite raw (G)\fR
+This parameter controls whether or not the server
+will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients.
+You should never need to change this parameter.
+
+Default: \fBwrite raw = yes\fR
+.TP
+\fBwriteable (S)\fR
+An inverted synonym is \fIread only\fR.
+
+If this parameter is no, then users
+of a service may not create or modify files in the service's
+directory.
+
+Note that a printable service (\fBprintable = yes\fR)
+will \fBALWAYS\fR allow writing to the directory
+(user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.
+
+Default: \fBwriteable = no\fR
+.SH "WARNINGS"
+.PP
+Although the configuration file permits service names
+to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will
+be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a
+problem - but be aware of the possibility.
+.PP
+On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients -
+limit service names to eight characters. smbd(8)
+has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such
+clients will fail if they truncate the service names. For this reason
+you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters
+in length.
+.PP
+Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life
+for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default
+attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these
+sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool
+directories are correct.
+.SH "VERSION"
+.PP
+This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
+the Samba suite.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+samba(7),
+\fBsmbpasswd(8)\fR,
+\fBswat(8)\fR,
+\fBsmbd(8)\fR,
+\fBnmbd(8)\fR,
+\fBsmbclient(1)\fR,
+\fBnmblookup(1)\fR,
+\fBtestparm(1)\fR,
+\fBtestprns(1)\fR
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+The original Samba software and related utilities
+were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
+by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar
+to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
+.PP
+The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer.
+The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another
+excellent piece of Open Source software, available at
+ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/ <URL:ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/>) and updated for the Samba 2.0
+release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for
+Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter